[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2025000242A1 - Modulation and coding scheme determination method, communication device, and storage medium - Google Patents

Modulation and coding scheme determination method, communication device, and storage medium Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2025000242A1
WO2025000242A1 PCT/CN2023/102947 CN2023102947W WO2025000242A1 WO 2025000242 A1 WO2025000242 A1 WO 2025000242A1 CN 2023102947 W CN2023102947 W CN 2023102947W WO 2025000242 A1 WO2025000242 A1 WO 2025000242A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
modulation
coding strategy
time domain
index
data communication
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
PCT/CN2023/102947
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
王磊
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Beijing Xiaomi Mobile Software Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Beijing Xiaomi Mobile Software Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Beijing Xiaomi Mobile Software Co Ltd filed Critical Beijing Xiaomi Mobile Software Co Ltd
Priority to CN202380009838.4A priority Critical patent/CN117083965A/en
Priority to PCT/CN2023/102947 priority patent/WO2025000242A1/en
Publication of WO2025000242A1 publication Critical patent/WO2025000242A1/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Pending legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H04W72/0446Resources in time domain, e.g. slots or frames
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/50Allocation or scheduling criteria for wireless resources
    • H04W72/53Allocation or scheduling criteria for wireless resources based on regulatory allocation policies
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/50Allocation or scheduling criteria for wireless resources
    • H04W72/54Allocation or scheduling criteria for wireless resources based on quality criteria
    • H04W72/541Allocation or scheduling criteria for wireless resources based on quality criteria using the level of interference
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/50Allocation or scheduling criteria for wireless resources
    • H04W72/54Allocation or scheduling criteria for wireless resources based on quality criteria
    • H04W72/542Allocation or scheduling criteria for wireless resources based on quality criteria using measured or perceived quality

Definitions

  • the present disclosure relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a modulation and coding strategy determination method, a terminal, a network device, a communication device, a communication system and a storage medium.
  • Network devices can communicate with terminals in time domain units.
  • network devices can only perform uplink or downlink communication.
  • network devices can perform both uplink and downlink communication in a time slot unit, thereby achieving full-duplex communication of network devices.
  • full-duplex communication scenario there will be some technical problems.
  • the embodiments of the present disclosure propose a modulation and coding strategy determination method, a communication device, and a storage medium to solve the technical problems in the related art in a communication scenario where subbands are configured in a time domain unit.
  • a modulation coding strategy determination method is proposed, which is executed by a terminal, and the method includes: determining a modulation coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among multiple time domain units based on first information, wherein the multiple time domain units include a first type of time domain unit configured with a subband and a second type of time domain unit not configured with a subband.
  • a method for determining a modulation and coding strategy is proposed, which is executed by a network device, and the method includes: sending first information to a terminal, wherein the first information is used to determine a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among multiple time domain units, and the multiple time domain units include a first type of time domain unit configured with a subband and a second type of time domain unit not configured with a subband.
  • a method for determining a modulation and coding strategy comprising: a network device sends first information to a terminal; the terminal determines a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among multiple time domain units based on the first information, wherein the multiple time domain units include a first type of time domain unit configured with a subband and a second type of time domain unit not configured with a subband.
  • a terminal comprising: one or more processors; wherein the terminal is used to execute the modulation and coding strategy determination method described in the first aspect above.
  • a network device comprising: one or more processors; wherein the network device is used to execute the modulation and coding strategy determination method described in the second aspect above.
  • a communication device comprising: one or more processors; wherein the processor is used to call instructions so that the communication device executes the modulation and coding strategy determination method described in any one of the first aspect and the second aspect.
  • a communication system comprising a terminal, an access network device, and a core network device, wherein the terminal is configured to implement the modulation and coding strategy determination method described in any one of the first aspect and the second aspect.
  • a storage medium stores instructions, and when the instructions are executed on a communication device, the communication device executes any one of the first aspect and the second aspect.
  • the modulation and coding strategy determination method is provided, wherein the storage medium stores instructions, and when the instructions are executed on a communication device, the communication device executes any one of the first aspect and the second aspect.
  • FIG1 is a schematic diagram of the architecture of a communication system according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG2 is an interactive schematic diagram of a modulation and coding strategy determination method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG3 is a schematic flow chart of a method for determining a modulation and coding strategy according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG4 is a schematic diagram showing a network device performing full-duplex communication in a SBFD time slot according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG5 is a schematic diagram showing a central frequency point of a bandwidth portion according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG6 is a schematic diagram showing an uplink subband according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing a data communication according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram showing another data communication according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining a modulation and coding strategy according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG10 is a schematic block diagram of a terminal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic block diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device proposed in an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a chip proposed in an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the embodiments of the present disclosure provide a modulation and coding strategy determination method, a terminal, a network device, a communication device, a communication system, and a storage medium.
  • an embodiment of the present disclosure proposes a method for determining a modulation coding strategy, which is executed by a terminal, and the method includes: determining a modulation coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among multiple time domain units based on first information, wherein the multiple time domain units include a first type of time domain unit configured with a subband and a second type of time domain unit not configured with a subband.
  • the terminal can communicate data with the network device in multiple time domain units.
  • the multiple time domain units include a first type of time domain unit and a second type of time domain unit
  • the terminal can determine the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit based on the first information, wherein the modulation and coding strategies for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit may be different.
  • the terminal it is convenient for the terminal to adopt different modulation and coding strategies for data communication in the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit, which is conducive to alleviating the impact of interference on data communication in the first type of time domain unit, and thus ensuring the communication quality of data communication in the first type of time domain unit.
  • the data communication includes at least one of the following:
  • a physical downlink shared channel is received on the multiple time domain units based on a triggering manner.
  • the method described in this embodiment can be applied to a variety of data communication scenarios, which is convenient for expansion and implementation.
  • the first information is used to instruct the terminal to determine a first modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and a second modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit based on a first offset and a first index corresponding to a modulation and coding strategy indicated by a network device.
  • the terminal determines the first modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and the second modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit.
  • determining the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among multiple time domain units according to the first information includes: determining that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index, and the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is the second modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the second index, wherein the second index is determined according to the first index and the first offset; or determining that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index, and the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit is the second modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the second index, wherein the second index is determined according to the first index and the first offset.
  • the terminal determines the modulation and coding strategies corresponding to the two indexes respectively as the modulation and coding strategies for data communication on the two types of time domain units.
  • the method for determining a modulation and coding strategy further includes: determining, according to an instruction of a network device, that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index; or determining, according to an instruction of a network device, that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index.
  • the terminal determines the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index according to the instruction of the network device, specifically, the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on which type of time domain unit.
  • the method for determining the modulation and coding strategy also includes: determining, according to a protocol agreement, that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index; or determining, according to a protocol agreement, that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index.
  • the terminal determines the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index according to the protocol agreement, specifically, the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on which type of time domain unit.
  • the first offset is determined based on a protocol agreement, or is indicated by a network device.
  • the first information is used to instruct the terminal to determine a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among the multiple time domain units according to multiple first indexes corresponding to multiple modulation and coding strategies.
  • the terminal determines the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit based on multiple first indexes without considering the first offset, which facilitates determining the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on multiple time domain units.
  • the multiple first indices are two first indices, wherein the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to one first index is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit, and the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the other first index is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit.
  • the first information is used to instruct the terminal to determine the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among the multiple time domain units according to a first index corresponding to a modulation and coding strategy indicated by a network device and multiple modulation and coding strategy tables.
  • the terminal determines the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit based on a first index and multiple modulation and coding strategy tables, rather than multiple first indexes, which is beneficial to saving resources of network device indication indexes.
  • the multiple modulation and coding strategy tables are two modulation and coding strategy tables, wherein the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index in one modulation and coding strategy table is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit, and the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index in another modulation and coding strategy table is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit.
  • the subband includes at least one of the following: an uplink subband; a downlink subband.
  • the first information includes at least one of the following: a rule agreed upon by a protocol; or a signaling of a network device.
  • an embodiment of the present disclosure proposes a method for determining a modulation and coding strategy, which is executed by a network device, and the method includes: sending first information to a terminal, wherein the first information is used to determine a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among multiple time domain units, and the multiple time domain units include a first type of time domain unit configured with a subband and a second type of time domain unit not configured with a subband.
  • the data communication includes at least one of the following:
  • a physical downlink shared channel is received on the multiple time domain units based on a triggering manner.
  • the first information is used to instruct the terminal to determine a first modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and a second modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit based on a first offset and a first index corresponding to a modulation and coding strategy indicated by a network device.
  • the modulation and coding strategy determination method further includes: instructing the terminal to determine that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index; or, instructing the terminal to determine that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index.
  • the first offset is determined based on a protocol agreement, or is indicated by the network device.
  • the first information is used to instruct the terminal to determine a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among the multiple time domain units according to multiple first indexes corresponding to multiple modulation and coding strategies.
  • the multiple first indices are two first indices, wherein the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to one first index is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit, and the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the other first index is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit.
  • the first information is used to instruct the terminal to determine the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among the multiple time domain units according to a first index corresponding to a modulation and coding strategy indicated by a network device and multiple modulation and coding strategy tables.
  • the multiple modulation and coding strategy tables are two modulation and coding strategy tables, wherein the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index in one modulation and coding strategy table is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit, and the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index in another modulation and coding strategy table is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit.
  • the subband includes at least one of the following: an uplink subband; a downlink subband.
  • an embodiment of the present disclosure proposes a method for determining a modulation and coding strategy, the method comprising: a network device sends first information to a terminal; the terminal determines a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among multiple time domain units based on the first information, wherein the multiple time domain units include a first type of time domain unit configured with a subband and a second type of time domain unit not configured with a subband.
  • an embodiment of the present disclosure proposes a terminal, comprising: one or more processors; wherein the terminal is used to execute the modulation and coding strategy determination method described in the first aspect and the optional implementation method of the first aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present disclosure proposes a network device, comprising: one or more processors; wherein the network device is used to execute the modulation and coding strategy determination method described in the first aspect and the optional implementation method of the second aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present disclosure proposes a communication device, wherein the communication device includes: one or more processors; one or more memories for storing instructions; wherein the processor is used to call the instructions so that the communication device executes the xx method described in the first and second aspects, and the optional implementation methods of the first and second aspects.
  • an embodiment of the present disclosure proposes a communication system, which includes: a terminal, an access network device, and a core network device; wherein the terminal is configured to execute the method described in the first aspect and the second aspect, and the optional implementation of the first aspect and the second aspect, and the network device is configured to execute the method described in the first aspect and the second aspect, and the optional implementation of the first aspect and the second aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present disclosure proposes a storage medium, wherein the storage medium stores instructions.
  • the instructions When the instructions are executed on a communication device, the communication device executes the method described in the first and second aspects, and the optional implementation methods of the first and second aspects.
  • an embodiment of the present disclosure proposes a program product.
  • the communication device executes the method described in the first and second aspects and the optional implementation methods of the first and second aspects.
  • an embodiment of the present disclosure proposes a computer program, which, when executed on a computer, enables the computer to execute the method described in the first and second aspects, and the optional implementations of the first and second aspects.
  • the embodiments of the present disclosure propose a modulation and coding strategy determination method, a communication device, and a storage medium.
  • the terms such as modulation and coding strategy determination method, information processing method, and communication method can be replaced with each other, the terms such as terminal, network device, information processing device, and communication device can be replaced with each other, and the terms such as information processing system and communication system can be replaced with each other.
  • each step in a certain embodiment can be implemented as an independent embodiment, and the steps can be arbitrarily combined.
  • a solution after removing some steps in a certain embodiment can also be implemented as an independent embodiment, and the order of the steps in a certain embodiment can be arbitrarily exchanged.
  • the optional implementation methods in a certain embodiment can be arbitrarily combined; in addition, the embodiments can be arbitrarily combined, for example, some or all of the steps of different embodiments can be arbitrarily combined, and a certain embodiment can be arbitrarily combined with the optional implementation methods of other embodiments.
  • plurality refers to two or more.
  • the terms "at least one of”, “one or more”, “a plurality of”, “multiple”, etc. can be used interchangeably.
  • "at least one of A and B", “A and/or B", “A in one case, B in another case”, “in response to one case A, in response to another case B”, etc. may include the following technical solutions according to the situation: in some embodiments, A (A is executed independently of B); in some embodiments, B (B is executed independently of A); in some embodiments, execution is selected from A and B (A and B are selectively executed); in some embodiments, A and B (both A and B are executed). When there are more branches such as A, B, C, etc., the above is also similar.
  • the recording method of "A or B” may include the following technical solutions according to the situation: in some embodiments, A (A is executed independently of B); in some embodiments, B (B is executed independently of A); in some embodiments, execution is selected from A and B (A and B are selectively executed).
  • A A is executed independently of B
  • B B is executed independently of A
  • execution is selected from A and B (A and B are selectively executed).
  • prefixes such as “first” and “second” in the embodiments of the present disclosure are only used to distinguish different description objects, and do not limit the position, order, priority, quantity or content of the description objects.
  • the description of the description objects please refer to the description in the context of the claims or embodiments, and the use of prefixes should not constitute unnecessary restrictions.
  • the description object is "field”
  • the ordinal number before “field” in “first field” and “second field” does not limit the order between "fields”.
  • first and “second” do not limit whether the "fields” they modify are in the same message, nor do they limit the order of the "first field” and the "second field”.
  • the description object is "level”
  • the ordinal number before the "level” in “first level” and “second level” does not limit the priority between the "levels”.
  • the number of description objects is not limited by ordinal numbers and can be one or more.
  • “first device” is used as an example, in which the number of "devices” can be one or more.
  • the objects modified by different prefixes can be the same or different.
  • the description object is "device”
  • the “first device” and the “second device” can be the same device or different devices, and their types can be the same or different.
  • the description object is "information”
  • the "first information” and the “second information” can be the same information or different information, and their contents can be the same or different.
  • “including A”, “comprising A”, “used to indicate A”, and “carrying A” can be interpreted as directly carrying A or indirectly indicating A.
  • devices and the like can be interpreted as physical or virtual, and their names are not limited to those in the embodiments.
  • network may be interpreted as devices included in the network (eg, access network equipment, core network equipment, etc.).
  • terminal In some embodiments, the terms "terminal”, “terminal device”, “user equipment (UE)”, “user terminal” “mobile station (MS)”, “mobile terminal (MT)", subscriber station, mobile unit, subscriber unit, wireless unit, remote unit, mobile device, wireless device, wireless communication device, remote device, mobile subscriber station, access terminal, mobile terminal, wireless terminal, remote terminal, handset, user agent, mobile client, client and the like can be used interchangeably.
  • the access network device, the core network device, or the network device may be replaced by a terminal.
  • the embodiments of the present disclosure may also be applied to a structure in which the communication between the access network device, the core network device, or the network device and the terminal is replaced by communication between multiple terminals (for example, device-to-device (D2D), vehicle-to-everything (V2X), etc.).
  • D2D device-to-device
  • V2X vehicle-to-everything
  • the terminal has all or part of the functions of the access network device.
  • the terms “uplink” and “downlink” may also be replaced.
  • the term “side” may be replaced with a term corresponding to inter-terminal communication (eg, "uplink channel", downlink channel, etc.).
  • uplink channel, downlink channel, etc. may be replaced with sidelink channel
  • uplink, downlink, etc. may be replaced with sidelink.
  • the terminal may be replaced by an access network device, a core network device, or a network device.
  • the access network device, the core network device, or the network device may also be configured to have a structure that has all or part of the functions of the terminal.
  • acquisition of data, information, etc. may comply with the laws and regulations of the country where the data is obtained.
  • data, information, etc. may be obtained with the user's consent.
  • each element, each row, or each column in the table of the embodiments of the present disclosure may be implemented as an independent embodiment, and the combination of any elements, any rows, or any columns may also be implemented as an independent embodiment.
  • FIG1 is a schematic diagram of the architecture of a communication system according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the communication system 100 includes a terminal 101 and a network device 102, wherein the network device includes at least one of the following: an access network device and a core network device.
  • the terminal 101 includes, for example, a mobile phone, a wearable device, an Internet of Things device, a car with communication function, a smart car, a tablet computer (Pad), a computer with wireless transceiver function, a virtual reality (VR) terminal device, an augmented reality (AR) terminal device, a wireless terminal device in industrial control, a wireless terminal device in self-driving, a wireless terminal device in remote medical surgery, a wireless terminal device in a smart grid, a wireless terminal device in transportation safety, a wireless terminal device in a smart city, and at least one of a wireless terminal device in a smart home, but is not limited to these.
  • a mobile phone a wearable device, an Internet of Things device, a car with communication function, a smart car, a tablet computer (Pad), a computer with wireless transceiver function, a virtual reality (VR) terminal device, an augmented reality (AR) terminal device, a wireless terminal device in industrial control, a wireless terminal device in self-driving, a wireless terminal device
  • the access network device is, for example, a node or device that accesses a terminal to a wireless network.
  • the access network device may include an evolved Node B (eNB), a next generation evolved Node B (ng-eNB), a next generation Node B (gNB), a node B (NB), a home node B (HNB), a home evolved node B (HeNB), a wireless backhaul device, a radio network controller (RNC), a base station controller (BSC), a base transceiver station (BTS), a base band unit (BBU), a mobile switching center, a base station in a 6G communication system, an open base station (Open RAN), a cloud base station (Cloud RAN), a base station in other communication systems, and at least one of an access node in a Wi-Fi system, but is not limited thereto.
  • eNB evolved Node B
  • ng-eNB next generation evolved Node B
  • gNB next generation Node B
  • NB node
  • the core network device may be a device including one or more network elements, or may be multiple devices or device groups, each including all or part of the one or more network elements.
  • the network element may be virtual or physical.
  • the core network may include, for example, at least one of the Evolved Packet Core (EPC), the 5G Core Network (5GCN), and the Next Generation Core (NGC).
  • EPC Evolved Packet Core
  • 5GCN 5G Core Network
  • NGC Next Generation Core
  • the technical solution of the present disclosure may be applicable to the Open RAN architecture.
  • the interfaces between access network devices or within access network devices involved in the embodiments of the present disclosure may become internal interfaces of Open RAN, and the processes and information interactions between these internal interfaces may be implemented through software or programs.
  • the access network device may be composed of a centralized unit (central unit, CU) and a distributed unit (distributed unit, DU), wherein the CU may also be referred to as a control unit (control unit).
  • the CU-DU structure may be used to split the protocol layer of the access network device, with some functions of the protocol layer being centrally controlled by the CU, and the remaining part or all of the functions of the protocol layer being distributed in the DU, and the DU being centrally controlled by the CU, but not limited to this.
  • the communication system described in the embodiment of the present disclosure is for the purpose of more clearly illustrating the technical solution of the embodiment of the present disclosure, and does not constitute a limitation on the technical solution proposed in the embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • a person of ordinary skill in the art can know that with the evolution of the system architecture and the emergence of new business scenarios, the technical solution proposed in the embodiment of the present disclosure is also applicable to similar technical problems.
  • the following embodiments of the present disclosure may be applied to the communication system 100 shown in FIG1 , or part of the subject, but are not limited thereto.
  • the subjects shown in FIG1 are examples, and the communication system may include all or part of the subjects in FIG1 , or may include other subjects other than FIG1 , and the number and form of the subjects are arbitrary, and the subjects may be physical or virtual, and the connection relationship between the subjects is an example, and the subjects may be connected or disconnected, and the connection may be in any manner, and may be a direct connection or an indirect connection, and may be a wired connection or a wireless connection.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • LTE-A LTE-Advanced
  • LTE-B LTE-Beyond
  • SUPER 3G IMT-Advanced
  • 4G the fourth generation mobile communication system
  • 5G 5G new radio
  • FAA Future Radio Access
  • RAT New Radio
  • NR New Radio
  • NX New radio access
  • the present invention relates to wireless communication systems such as LTE, Wi-Fi (X), Global System for Mobile communications (GSM (registered trademark)), CDMA2000, Ultra Mobile Broadband (UMB), IEEE 802.11 (Wi-Fi (registered trademark)), IEEE 802.16 (WiMAX (registered trademark)), IEEE 802.20, Ultra-WideBand (UWB), Bluetooth (registered trademark), Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN) network, Device to Device (D2D) system, Machine to Machine (M2M) system, Internet of Things (IoT) system, Vehicle to Everything (V2X), systems using other communication methods, and next-generation systems expanded based on them.
  • PLMN Public Land Mobile Network
  • D2D Device to Device
  • M2M Machine to Machine
  • IoT Internet of Things
  • V2X Vehicle to Everything
  • systems using other communication methods and next-generation systems expanded based on them.
  • next-generation systems expanded based on them.
  • a combination of multiple systems for example, a combination of
  • the network device may configure a sub-band for the terminal.
  • the subband includes at least one of the following: an uplink subband and a downlink subband.
  • the network device may configure an uplink subband for the terminal in a first type of time slot, wherein the first type of time slot includes at least one of the following: a downlink time slot and a flexible time slot.
  • the frequency domain resources corresponding to the downlink time slot are the downlink frequency domain resources, and an uplink sub-band is configured for the terminal in the downlink time slot.
  • the frequency domain resources corresponding to the uplink sub-band in the frequency domain resources of the downlink time slot can be used for uplink communication, so that the network equipment can perform uplink communication in the uplink sub-band corresponding to the downlink time slot, and perform downlink communication in the frequency domain resources outside the uplink sub-band, thereby realizing full-duplex communication.
  • the frequency domain resources corresponding to the flexible time slot can be configured or scheduled as downlink frequency domain resources, and the uplink subband is configured for the terminal in the flexible time slot, and the frequency domain resources corresponding to the uplink subband in the frequency domain resources of the flexible time slot can be used for uplink communication, so that the network equipment can perform uplink communication in the uplink subband corresponding to the flexible time slot, and perform downlink communication in the frequency domain resources outside the uplink subband, thereby realizing full-duplex communication.
  • a time domain unit configured with a subband can be called a subband based full duplex (SBFD) time domain unit.
  • SBFD subband based full duplex
  • the network device may configure a downlink subband for the terminal in a second type of time slot, wherein the second type of time slot includes at least one of the following: an uplink time slot and a flexible time slot.
  • the frequency domain resources corresponding to the uplink time slot are the uplink frequency domain resources, and the downlink subband is configured for the terminal in the uplink time slot.
  • the frequency domain resources corresponding to the downlink subband in the frequency domain resources of the uplink time slot can be used for downlink communication, so that the network equipment can perform downlink communication in the downlink subband corresponding to the uplink time slot, as well as in the frequency domain resources outside the downlink subband. Uplink communication is carried out in the , thus achieving full-duplex communication.
  • the frequency domain resources corresponding to the flexible time slot can be configured or scheduled as uplink frequency domain resources, and a downlink sub-band is configured for the terminal in the flexible time slot.
  • the frequency domain resources corresponding to the downlink sub-band in the frequency domain resources of the flexible time slot can be used for downlink communication. Therefore, the network equipment can perform downlink communication in the downlink sub-band corresponding to the flexible time slot, and perform uplink communication in the frequency domain resources outside the downlink sub-band, thereby realizing full-duplex communication.
  • the communication that can be performed between the terminal and the network device in the time domain unit includes at least one of the following: data communication, non-data communication (eg, signaling communication).
  • a terminal When a terminal performs data communication in a time domain unit (for example, the terminal sends a transport block (TB) to a network device or receives a transport block sent by a network device), in some scenarios, data communication can be performed in multiple time domain units, for example, the Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH) can be repeatedly received (repetition) in multiple time domain units.
  • PDSCH Physical Downlink Shared Channel
  • MCS modulation and coding scheme
  • the multiple time domain units include SBFD time domain units and non-SBFD time domain units (i.e., time domain units without subband configuration)
  • the interference in the SBFD time domain units is relatively large relative to the interference in the non-SBFD time domain units.
  • the interference may include interference for the network device and/or interference for the terminal.
  • FIG2 is an interactive schematic diagram of a modulation and coding strategy determination method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the modulation and coding strategy determination method may include the following steps:
  • Step S201 The network device sends first information to the terminal.
  • the terminal receives first information.
  • the first information is used to determine a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among the plurality of time domain units.
  • the plurality of time domain units include first-type time domain units configured with subbands and second-type time domain units not configured with subbands.
  • the time domain unit includes at least one of the following: a frame, a subframe, a time slot, and a symbol, wherein the symbol may be, for example, an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing symbol.
  • the network device may send first indication information to the terminal, and the first indication information may include a first index.
  • the terminal can determine the second index based on the first index and the first offset, so that the first index and the second index can correspond to the modulation and coding strategies respectively, for example, the first index corresponds to the first modulation and coding strategy, and the second index corresponds to the second modulation and coding strategy.
  • Step S202 The terminal determines a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among a plurality of time domain units according to the first information.
  • the first information may be received from a network device, or the first information may be received from a network device. Determined according to the agreement.
  • the terminal when the terminal determines the first information according to a protocol agreement, the terminal may perform an operation according to step S202, and step S201 is optional.
  • the network device when receiving the first information from the network device, may send the first information to the terminal via radio resource control signaling.
  • the data communication includes at least one of the following:
  • a physical downlink shared channel is received on the multiple time domain units based on a triggering manner.
  • the terminal may store an association relationship between the index and the modulation and coding strategy, wherein the association relationship may be, for example, a relationship table between the modulation and coding strategy and the index.
  • the first information is used to instruct the terminal to determine a first modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and a second modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit based on a first offset and a first index corresponding to a modulation and coding strategy indicated by a network device.
  • determining the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among multiple time domain units based on the first information includes: determining the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit as the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index, and determining the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit as the second modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the second index, wherein the second index is determined based on the first index and the first offset.
  • determining the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among multiple time domain units based on the first information includes: determining the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit as the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index, and determining the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit as the second modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the second index, wherein the second index is determined based on the first index and the first offset.
  • the modulation and coding strategy determination method further includes: determining, according to an instruction of a network device, that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit is a first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index.
  • the modulation and coding strategy determination method further includes: determining, according to an instruction of a network device, that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index.
  • the modulation and coding strategy determination method further includes: determining, according to a protocol agreement, that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit is a first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index.
  • the modulation and coding strategy determination method further includes: determining, according to a protocol agreement, that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index.
  • the first offset is determined based on a protocol agreement.
  • the first offset is indicated by a network device.
  • the first information is used to indicate that the terminal corresponds to a plurality of modulation and coding strategies.
  • a plurality of first indexes are used to determine a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among the plurality of time domain units.
  • the plurality of first indexes are two first indexes.
  • the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to a first index is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit
  • the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to another first index is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit.
  • the network device can indicate to the terminal the association relationship between the two first indexes and the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit, or the terminal can determine the association relationship between the two first indexes and the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit based on protocol agreement.
  • the first information is used to instruct the terminal to determine the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among the multiple time domain units according to a first index corresponding to a modulation and coding strategy indicated by a network device and multiple modulation and coding strategy tables.
  • the modulation and coding strategy table may be determined according to a protocol agreement, or may be indicated by a network device.
  • the network device may indicate multiple modulation and coding strategy tables to the terminal through radio resource control signaling.
  • the multiple modulation and coding strategy tables are two modulation and coding strategy tables, wherein the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index in one modulation and coding strategy table is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit, and the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index in another modulation and coding strategy table is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit.
  • the network device can indicate to the terminal the association relationship between the two modulation and coding strategy tables and the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit, or the terminal can determine the association relationship between the two modulation and coding strategy tables and the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit based on protocol agreement.
  • the sub-band includes at least one of the following: an uplink sub-band; a downlink sub-band.
  • the first information includes at least one of the following: rules agreed upon by a protocol; signaling of a network device.
  • the communication method involved in the embodiment of the present disclosure may include at least one of step S201 to step S202.
  • step S201 may be implemented as an independent embodiment
  • step S201 may be implemented as an independent embodiment
  • step S201+S202 may be implemented as an independent embodiment, but it is not limited thereto.
  • steps S201 and S202 may be performed in an interchangeable order or simultaneously.
  • an embodiment of the present disclosure proposes a method for determining a modulation and coding strategy.
  • Fig. 3 is a schematic flow chart of a method for determining a modulation and coding strategy according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the method for determining a modulation and coding strategy shown in this embodiment can be executed by a terminal.
  • the modulation and coding strategy determination method may include the following steps:
  • a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among a plurality of time domain units is determined according to first information, wherein the plurality of time domain units include a first type of time domain unit configured with a subband and a second type of time domain unit not configured with a subband.
  • the first information includes at least one of the following: rules agreed upon by a protocol; signaling of a network device, such as Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • the terminal can communicate data with a network device in multiple time domain units.
  • the multiple time domain units include a first type of time domain unit (e.g., an SBFD time domain unit) and a second type of time domain unit (e.g., a non-SBFD time domain unit)
  • the terminal can determine the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit based on the first information, wherein the modulation and coding strategies for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit may be different.
  • the terminal it is convenient for the terminal to adopt different modulation and coding strategies for data communication in the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit, which is conducive to alleviating the impact of interference on data communication in the first type of time domain unit, and thus ensuring the communication quality of data communication in the first type of time domain unit.
  • data communication is not limited to the terminal receiving the repeatedly transmitted physical downlink shared channel, and may also include other types of data communication.
  • data communication includes at least one of the following:
  • a physical uplink shared channel (Physical Uplink Shared Channel, PUSCH) repeatedly transmitted on the plurality of time domain units;
  • a physical downlink shared channel is received on the multiple time domain units based on a triggering manner.
  • the repeatedly transmitted physical uplink shared channel includes at least one of the following: PUSCH repetition Type A, PUSCH repetition Type B.
  • the physical uplink shared channel sent based on the configuration authorization method includes at least one of the following: type-1 CG PUSCH, type-2 CG PUSCH.
  • the physical downlink shared channel received based on the triggering manner includes but is not limited to a semi-persistent scheduling (Semi-Persistent Scheduling, SPS) physical downlink shared channel, wherein the semi-persistent scheduling physical downlink shared channel can be triggered by downlink control information (Downlink Control Information, DCI).
  • SPS semi-persistent Scheduling
  • DCI Downlink Control Information
  • the time domain unit includes at least one of the following: a frame, a subframe, a time slot, and a symbol, wherein the symbol may be, for example, an OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing) symbol.
  • OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing
  • FIG4 is a schematic diagram showing a network device performing full-duplex communication in a SBFD time slot according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the frequency domain resources corresponding to the downlink time slot include at least one bandwidth part (BandWidth Part, BWP).
  • BWP bandwidth part
  • the network device can perform uplink communication with the terminal in the uplink subband in the downlink time slot, and can also perform downlink communication with the terminal in the frequency domain resources outside the uplink subband, and the uplink resources used for uplink communication and the downlink resources used for downlink communication may not overlap. It should be noted that the terminal performing uplink communication and the terminal performing downlink communication in the same time slot may be different terminals.
  • the network device can perform uplink communication with the terminal in the uplink subband in the downlink time slot, and can also perform downlink communication with the terminal in the uplink subband.
  • the uplink resources used for uplink communication and the downlink resources used for downlink communication can completely overlap.
  • the network device can perform uplink communication with the terminal in the uplink subband in the downlink time slot, and can also perform downlink communication with the terminal in the uplink subband and frequency domain resources outside the uplink subband.
  • the uplink resources used for uplink communication and the downlink resources used for downlink communication can partially overlap.
  • FIG5 is a schematic diagram showing a central frequency point of a bandwidth portion according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the SBFD time slot may correspond to a time division duplexing (TDD) frequency band in the frequency domain
  • the network device may configure an uplink bandwidth part and a downlink bandwidth part for the terminal in the TDD frequency band.
  • TDD time division duplexing
  • the network device may align the center frequency point of the uplink bandwidth part with the center frequency point of the downlink bandwidth part, and then configure the uplink bandwidth part and the downlink bandwidth part after the center frequency points are aligned to the terminal.
  • the frequency domain ranges of the downlink bandwidth part and the uplink bandwidth part may be the same or different, and the present disclosure does not limit this.
  • the time slot structure configured by the network device for the terminal through time division duplex uplink and downlink configuration is DDDDDDSUUU, where D represents the downlink time slot, U represents the uplink time slot, and S represents the flexible time slot. That is, in the 10 time slots, slot#0 to slot#5 are downlink time slots, slot#6 is the flexible time slot, and slot#7 to slot#9 are uplink time slots.
  • the frequency domain resources corresponding to the downlink time slot may include a downlink bandwidth part, and the frequency domain resources corresponding to the uplink time slot may include an uplink bandwidth part.
  • the operation of aligning the center frequency of the uplink bandwidth part and the center frequency of the downlink bandwidth part can be applicable to scenarios based on asymmetric spectrum (unpaired spectrum) communication, and can also be applicable to scenarios based on symmetric spectrum (paired spectrum) communication.
  • the first information is used to instruct the terminal to determine a first modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and a second modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit based on a first offset and a first index corresponding to a modulation and coding strategy indicated by a network device.
  • the terminal may store an association relationship between an index and a modulation and coding strategy, wherein the association relationship may be, for example, a relationship table between the modulation and coding strategy and the index.
  • the network device may send a first indication information to the terminal, and the first indication information may include a first index.
  • the terminal may determine the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index in the above association relationship, and may also determine the second coding strategy based on the first index and the first offset according to the indication of the first information. Then, data communication may be performed on the first type of time domain unit according to one of the first modulation and coding strategies and the second modulation and coding strategies, and data communication may be performed on the second type of time domain unit according to the other modulation and coding strategy of the first modulation and coding strategy and the second modulation and coding strategy.
  • the first indication information is included in the first information, or the first indication information may be included outside the first information.
  • the first offset is determined based on a protocol agreement or is indicated by a network device.
  • the first offset can be a positive integer or a negative integer.
  • the network device may carry the first offset and the first index through the first indication information.
  • the network device may indicate the first offset to the terminal in advance before sending the first indication information.
  • the network device may carry the first offset or the index of the first offset through RRC signaling (also referred to as RRC message) before the first indication information and send it to the terminal.
  • RRC signaling also referred to as RRC message
  • the network device may not need to indicate to the terminal
  • the first indication information may indicate the first offset, for example, the first indication information may only carry the first index but not the first offset.
  • the terminal may determine the first offset according to the protocol agreement.
  • the terminal can determine multiple first offsets based on the protocol agreement, and can also determine the association between the first offset and the first index based on the protocol agreement, and then the terminal can determine the first offset corresponding to the first index indicated by the network device based on the association between the first offset and the first index. Accordingly, it is conducive to flexibly determining the first offset.
  • determining, according to the first information, a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among the plurality of time domain units comprises:
  • the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index
  • the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is the second modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the second index
  • the second index is determined according to the first index and the first offset
  • the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index
  • the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit is the second modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the second index
  • the second index is determined based on the first index and the first offset
  • the network device may send a first indication message to the terminal, and the first indication message may include a first index. Since an index corresponds to a modulation and coding strategy, in order to determine the first modulation and coding strategy and the second modulation and coding strategy, the terminal may determine the second index based on the first index and the first offset, so that the first index and the second index may correspond to the modulation and coding strategies respectively, for example, the first index corresponds to the first modulation and coding strategy, and the second index corresponds to the second modulation and coding strategy.
  • the first index can be used as a reference index.
  • the terminal can add (or subtract) the first offset based on the reference index to obtain the second index, and then determine that the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the second index is the second modulation and coding strategy.
  • the second index can be determined based on the first index and the first offset, and the second modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the second index can be determined. Then, the second modulation and coding strategy can be used as the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit.
  • the second index can be determined based on the first index and the first offset, and the second modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the second index can be determined. Then, the second modulation and coding strategy can be used as the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit.
  • the modulation and coding strategy determination method further includes:
  • the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index
  • the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is determined to be the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index.
  • the network device may send a first indication message to the terminal, and the first indication message may include a first index. Since an index corresponds to a modulation and coding strategy, the terminal also needs to determine whether the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit or the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit.
  • the network device may indicate whether the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index is a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit or a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit.
  • the terminal can determine, according to the indication of the network device, that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index.
  • the terminal can determine, according to the indication of the network device, that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index.
  • the modulation and coding strategy determination method further includes:
  • the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index
  • the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is determined to be the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index.
  • the network device may send a first indication message to the terminal, and the first indication message may include a first index. Since an index corresponds to a modulation and coding strategy, the terminal also needs to determine whether the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit or the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit.
  • the protocol agreement can determine whether the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit or the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit.
  • the terminal can determine, according to the protocol agreement, that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index.
  • the terminal can determine, according to the protocol agreement, that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index.
  • FIG6 is a schematic diagram showing an uplink subband according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • a subband includes an uplink subband
  • a time domain unit includes a time slot
  • a network device configures an uplink subband for a terminal in a downlink time slot.
  • the time slot structure determined by the terminal according to the TDD UL-DL configuration is DDDDDDSUUU
  • a TDD UL-DL periodicity includes 10 time slots, slot#0 to slot#9
  • the network device configures an uplink subband in slot#0 to slot#3.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing a data communication according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the data communication performed by the terminal on multiple time slots includes PUSCH repetition, the number of repeated transmissions of PUSCH repetition is 4, and the 4 repeated PUSCHs are located in slot #8 and slot #9 in TDD UL-DL cycle #1, and slot #0 and slot #1 in TDD UL-DL cycle #2.
  • the network device can not only receive PUSCH repetition on the uplink subband in slot#0 and slot#1 of cycle #2, but also perform downlink communication on frequency domain resources outside the uplink subband. For example, downlink communication can interfere with the process of receiving PUSCH repetition. However, in slot#8 and slot#9 of cycle #1, only PUSCH is received, and downlink communication is not performed. Therefore, there is no interference of downlink communication on the process of receiving PUSCH. It can be seen that the interference on slot#0 and slot#1 of cycle #2 is stronger than the interference on slot#8 and slot#9 of cycle #1.
  • the modulation and coding strategy is determined by only considering the interference conditions in slot#8 and slot#9 in cycle #1, and the modulation and coding strategy is applied to slot#0 and slot#1 in cycle #2, since the interference in slot#0 and slot#1 in cycle #2 is relatively strong, it is difficult to alleviate the interference in slot#0 and slot#1 in cycle #2 when the modulation and coding strategy is adopted, which is easy to affect the communication quality of the network device receiving PUSCH repetition in slot#0 and slot#1 in cycle #2.
  • the terminal may determine the first index, and then the terminal may determine the second index according to the first index and the first offset. For example, the terminal determines that the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit according to an instruction of the network device or a protocol agreement.
  • the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index 13 is more conducive to ensuring the communication quality of data communication when the interference is relatively strong than the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index 15, the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index 13 is used for PUSCH repetition communication in slot #0 and slot #1 in period #2 where the interference is relatively strong, which is conducive to ensuring good communication quality.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram showing another data communication according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the data communication performed by the terminal on multiple time slots includes CG PUSCH (e.g., Type-1 CG PUSCH), and the transmission period of CG PUSCH is 5 time slots.
  • FIG8 shows three CG PUSCH transmissions, which are respectively located in slot #8 in TDD UL-DL cycle #1, and slot #3 and slot #8 in TDD UL-DL cycle #2.
  • the network device can not only receive CG PUSCH on the uplink subband on slot#3 of cycle #2, but also perform downlink communication on frequency domain resources outside the uplink subband. For example, downlink communication can interfere with the process of receiving CG PUSCH. However, only PUSCH is received on slot#8 of cycle #1 and cycle #2, and downlink communication is not performed. Therefore, there is no interference of downlink communication on the process of receiving CG PUSCH. It can be seen that the interference on slot#3 of cycle #2 is stronger than the interference on slot#8 of cycle #1 and cycle #2.
  • the modulation and coding strategy is determined by considering only the interference conditions in slot #8 in cycle #1 and cycle #2, and the modulation and coding strategy is applied to slot #3 in cycle #2, since the interference in slot #3 in cycle #2 is relatively strong, it is difficult to alleviate the interference in slot #3 in cycle #2 when the modulation and coding strategy is adopted, which can easily affect the communication quality of receiving CG PUSCH in slot #3 in cycle #2.
  • the terminal may determine the first index, and then the terminal may determine the second index according to the first index and the first offset. For example, the terminal determines that the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit according to an instruction of the network device or a protocol agreement.
  • the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index 13 is more conducive to ensuring the communication quality of data communication when the interference is relatively strong than the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index 15, the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index 13 is used for CG PUSCH communication in slot #3 in period #2 where the interference is relatively strong, which is conducive to ensuring good communication quality.
  • the first index may be indicated by a network device, but the first offset is agreed upon by the protocol, and whether the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit or the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is also agreed upon by the protocol.
  • the terminal determines according to the protocol that the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit, and the first offset offset is -6.
  • the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index 16 is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit (non-SBFD slot), and the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index 10 is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit (SBFD slot).
  • the first information is used to instruct the terminal to determine a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among the multiple time domain units based on a first index corresponding to a modulation and coding strategy indicated by a network device and multiple modulation and coding strategy tables (MCS tables).
  • MCS tables multiple modulation and coding strategy tables
  • multiple modulation and coding strategy tables may be agreed upon by the protocol, or may be pre-configured to the terminal by the network device (for example, before indicating the first index), and the modulation and coding strategy table may characterize the association between the modulation and coding strategy and the index.
  • each modulation and coding strategy table may be different, that is, the association between the modulation and coding strategy and the index may be different, then the terminal may determine different modulation and coding strategies in each modulation and coding strategy table according to a first index. Accordingly, the terminal may determine the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit, and ensure that the modulation and coding strategies for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit are different.
  • the modulation and coding strategy table may be determined according to a protocol agreement, or may be indicated by a network device.
  • the network device may indicate multiple modulation and coding strategy tables to the terminal via RRC signaling (also referred to as an RRC message).
  • the multiple modulation and coding strategy tables are two modulation and coding strategy tables, wherein the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index in one modulation and coding strategy table is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit, and the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index in another modulation and coding strategy table is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit.
  • two modulation and coding strategy tables are pre-stored in the terminal, and the terminal can determine a first index index#1 according to the first indication information.
  • the two modulation and coding strategy tables are MCS table#1 and MCS table#2. Then, the terminal can determine the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index#1 in MCS table#1, for example, MCS level 13, and determine the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index#1 in MCS table#2, for example, MCS level 15.
  • the network device can indicate to the terminal the association relationship between the two modulation and coding strategy tables and the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit, or the terminal can determine the association relationship between the two modulation and coding strategy tables and the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit based on protocol agreement.
  • the association relationship between the two modulation and coding strategy tables and the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit includes: MCS table#1 is associated with the first type of time domain unit, and MCS table#2 is associated with the second type of time domain unit. Then the modulation and coding strategy determined by the terminal in MCS table#1 according to the first index can be used as the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication in the first type of time domain unit, and the modulation and coding strategy determined in MCS table#2 according to the first index can be used as the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication in the second type of time domain unit.
  • the above embodiments mainly exemplarily describe the case where the terminal determines a first index according to the first information.
  • the following describes the case where the terminal determines multiple first indexes according to the first information through several embodiments.
  • the first information is used to instruct the terminal to determine the modulation and coding strategy of data communication on at least one time domain unit in the multiple time domain units according to multiple first indexes corresponding to multiple modulation and coding strategies. Strategy.
  • the network device can indicate multiple first indexes to the terminal through the first indication information, where one first index can correspond to a modulation and coding strategy.
  • the terminal can then determine multiple modulation and coding strategies based on the multiple first indexes, and further determine the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication in the first type of time domain unit and the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication in the second type of time domain unit from the multiple modulation and coding strategies, thereby determining the modulation and coding strategy for data communication in at least one time domain unit.
  • the multiple first indexes are two first indexes, wherein the modulation coding strategy corresponding to one first index is the modulation coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit, and the modulation coding strategy corresponding to another first index is the modulation coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit.
  • data communication includes PUSCH repetition
  • the network device can carry two modulation and coding strategy indication information (MCS indication) in the uplink grant (UL grant) scheduling PUSCH, such as the first indexes of two modulation and coding strategies, index#1 and index#2 respectively.
  • MCS indication modulation and coding strategy indication information
  • the terminal can determine the modulation and coding strategy MCS#1 corresponding to index#1, and determine the modulation and coding strategy MCS#2 corresponding to index#2. Since MCS#1 and MCS#2 can be different, the terminal can determine the modulation and coding strategies for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit, and ensure that the modulation and coding strategies for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit are different.
  • the network device can indicate to the terminal the association relationship between the two first indexes and the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit, or the terminal can determine the association relationship between the two first indexes and the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit based on protocol agreement.
  • the association relationship between the two first indexes and the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit may include at least one of the following: associating the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit respectively according to the index from small to large; associating the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit respectively according to the index from large to small.
  • index#1 can be associated with the first type of time domain unit, then the modulation and coding strategy MCS#1 corresponding to index#1 can be used as the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication in the first type of time domain unit; index#2 can be associated with the second type of time domain unit, then the modulation and coding strategy MCS#2 corresponding to index#2 can be used as the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication in the second type of time domain unit.
  • the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the first type of time domain unit determined by the terminal and the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the first type of time domain unit determined by the network device are the same, and accordingly, the terminal and the network device can use the same modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit.
  • the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the second type of time domain unit determined by the terminal and the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the second type of time domain unit determined by the network device are also the same, and accordingly, the terminal and the network device can use the same modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit.
  • the way in which the network device determines the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among multiple time domain units and the way in which the terminal determines the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among multiple time domain units may correspond.
  • the terminal determines the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the second type of time domain unit according to the first index and the first offset indicated by the network device.
  • the network device may also determine the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the second type of time domain unit according to the first index and the first offset indicated to the terminal.
  • the terminal determines the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the second type of time domain unit according to the multiple first indices indicated by the network device.
  • the network device may also determine the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the second type of time domain unit according to the multiple first indices indicated to the terminal.
  • the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the second type of time domain unit can be specifically referred to the above embodiments and will not be described in detail here.
  • an embodiment of the present disclosure proposes a method for determining a modulation and coding strategy.
  • Figure 9 is a schematic flow chart of a method for determining a modulation and coding strategy according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. The method for determining a modulation and coding strategy shown in this embodiment can be executed by a network device.
  • the modulation and coding strategy determination method may include the following steps:
  • step S901 first information is sent to the terminal, wherein the first information is used to determine a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among multiple time domain units, and the multiple time domain units include a first type of time domain unit configured with a subband and a second type of time domain unit not configured with a subband.
  • the network device may send the first information to the terminal via RRC signaling (also referred to as an RRC message).
  • RRC signaling also referred to as an RRC message
  • the network device may send first information to the terminal so that the terminal can determine a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit based on the first information, wherein the modulation and coding strategies for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit may be different.
  • first type of time domain unit e.g., an SBFD time domain unit
  • second type of time domain unit e.g., a non-SBFD time domain unit
  • the network device may send first information to the terminal so that the terminal can determine a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit based on the first information, wherein the modulation and coding strategies for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit may be different.
  • the terminal it is convenient for the terminal to adopt different modulation and coding strategies for data communication in the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit, which is conducive to alleviating the impact of interference on data communication in the first type of time domain unit, and thus ensuring the communication quality of data communication in the first type of time domain unit.
  • data communication is not limited to the terminal receiving the repeatedly transmitted physical downlink shared channel, and may also include other types of data communication.
  • data communication includes at least one of the following:
  • PUSCH Physical uplink shared channel
  • a physical downlink shared channel is received in a triggered manner on multiple time domain units.
  • the repeatedly transmitted physical uplink shared channel includes at least one of the following: PUSCH repetition Type A, PUSCH repetition Type B.
  • the physical uplink shared channel sent based on the configuration authorization method includes at least one of the following: type-1 CG PUSCH, type-2 CG PUSCH.
  • the physical downlink shared channel received based on the triggering manner includes but is not limited to a semi-persistent scheduling (SPS) physical downlink shared channel, wherein the semi-persistent scheduling physical downlink shared channel can be triggered by downlink control information (DCI).
  • SPS semi-persistent scheduling
  • DCI downlink control information
  • the time domain unit includes at least one of the following: a frame, a subframe, a time slot, and a symbol, wherein the symbol may be, for example, an OFDM symbol.
  • the first information is used to indicate that the terminal determines a first modulation and coding strategy for data communication on a first type of time domain unit and a second modulation and coding strategy for data communication on a second type of time domain unit based on a first offset and a first index corresponding to a modulation and coding strategy indicated by a network device.
  • the terminal may store an association relationship between an index and a modulation and coding strategy, wherein the association relationship may be, for example, a relationship table between the modulation and coding strategy and the index.
  • the network device may send a first indication information to the terminal, and the first indication information may include a first index.
  • the terminal may determine the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index in the above association relationship, and may also determine the second coding strategy based on the first index and the first offset according to the indication of the first information. Then, data communication may be performed on the first type of time domain unit according to one of the first modulation and coding strategies and the second modulation and coding strategies, and data communication may be performed on the second type of time domain unit according to the other modulation and coding strategy of the first modulation and coding strategy and the second modulation and coding strategy.
  • the first offset is determined based on a protocol agreement or is indicated by a network device.
  • the first offset may be a positive integer or a negative integer.
  • the network device may carry the first offset and the first index through the first indication information.
  • the network device may indicate the first offset to the terminal in advance before sending the first indication information.
  • the network device may carry the first offset or the index of the first offset through RRC signaling (also referred to as RRC message) before the first indication information and send it to the terminal.
  • RRC signaling also referred to as RRC message
  • the network device may not need to indicate the first offset to the terminal, for example, the first indication information may only carry the first index but not the first offset.
  • the terminal may determine the first offset based on the protocol agreement.
  • the method further comprises:
  • the terminal is instructed to determine that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index.
  • the network device may send a first indication message to the terminal, and the first indication message may include a first index. Since an index corresponds to a modulation and coding strategy, in order to determine the first modulation and coding strategy and the second modulation and coding strategy, the terminal may determine the second index based on the first index and the first offset, so that the first index and the second index may correspond to the modulation and coding strategies respectively, for example, the first index corresponds to the first modulation and coding strategy, and the second index corresponds to the second modulation and coding strategy.
  • the first index can be used as a reference index.
  • the terminal can add (or subtract) the first offset based on the reference index to obtain the second index, and then determine that the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the second index is the second modulation and coding strategy.
  • the network device may indicate whether the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index is a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit or a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit.
  • the terminal can determine, according to the indication of the network device, that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index.
  • the terminal can determine, according to the indication of the network device, that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index.
  • a subband includes an uplink subband
  • a time domain unit includes a time slot
  • a network device configures an uplink subband for a terminal in a downlink time slot.
  • the time slot structure determined by the terminal according to the TDD UL-DL configuration is DDDDDDSUUU
  • a TDD UL-DL periodicity includes 10 time slots, slot#0 to slot#9
  • the network device configures an uplink subband in slot#0 to slot#3.
  • the data communication performed by the terminal on multiple time slots includes PUSCH repetition, the number of repeated transmissions of PUSCH repetition is 4, and the 4 repeated PUSCHs are located in slot #8 and slot #9 in TDD UL-DL cycle #1, and slot #0 and slot #1 in TDD UL-DL cycle #2.
  • the network device can not only receive PUSCH repetition on the uplink subband in slot#0 and slot#1 of cycle #2, but also perform downlink communication on frequency domain resources outside the uplink subband. For example, downlink communication can interfere with the process of receiving PUSCH repetition. However, in slot#8 and slot#9 of cycle #1, only PUSCH is received, and downlink communication is not performed, so there is no interference of downlink communication on the process of receiving PUSCH. It can be seen that the interference on slot#0 and slot#1 of cycle #2 is stronger than the interference on slot#8 and slot#9 of cycle #1.
  • the modulation and coding strategy is determined by only considering the interference conditions in slot#8 and slot#9 in cycle #1, and the modulation and coding strategy is applied to slot#0 and slot#1 in cycle #2, since the interference in slot#0 and slot#1 in cycle #2 is relatively strong, it is difficult to alleviate the interference in slot#0 and slot#1 in cycle #2 when the modulation and coding strategy is adopted, which is easy to affect the communication quality of the network device receiving PUSCH repetition in slot#0 and slot#1 in cycle #2.
  • the terminal may determine the first index, and then the terminal may determine the second index according to the first index and the first offset. For example, the terminal determines that the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit according to an instruction of the network device or a protocol agreement.
  • the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index 13 is more conducive to ensuring the communication quality of data communication when the interference is relatively strong than the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index 15, the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index 13 is used for PUSCH repetition communication in slot #0 and slot #1 in period #2 where the interference is relatively strong, which is conducive to ensuring good communication quality.
  • the network device can also determine the modulation and coding strategy in the above manner, thereby determining the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index 13 (for example, the modulation and coding strategy level is 13) as the modulation and coding strategy for receiving PUSCH repetition on slot #0 and slot #1 in cycle #2, and determining the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index 15 (for example, the modulation and coding strategy level is 15) as the modulation and coding strategy for receiving PUSCH repetition on slot #8 and slot #9 in cycle #1.
  • the modulation and coding strategy level is 13
  • the modulation and coding strategy level is 15
  • the data communication performed by the terminal on multiple time slots includes CG PUSCH, and the transmission period of CG PUSCH is 5 time slots.
  • FIG8 shows three CG PUSCH transmissions, which are located in slot #8 in TDD UL-DL cycle #1, and slot #3 and slot #8 in TDD UL-DL cycle #2.
  • the network device can not only receive CG PUSCH on the uplink subband in slot#3 of cycle#2, but also perform downlink communication on frequency domain resources outside the uplink subband. For example, downlink communication can interfere with the process of receiving CG PUSCH. However, in slot#8 of cycle#1 and cycle#2, only PUSCH is received, and downlink communication is not performed. Therefore, there is no interference of downlink communication on the process of receiving CG PUSCH. It can be seen that the interference on slot #3 of cycle #2 is stronger than the interference on slot #8 of cycle #1 and cycle #2.
  • the modulation and coding strategy is determined by only considering the interference conditions in slot #8 in cycle #1 and cycle #2, and the modulation and coding strategy is applied to slot #3 in cycle #2, since the interference in slot #3 in cycle #2 is relatively strong, it is difficult to alleviate the interference in slot #3 in cycle #2 when the modulation and coding strategy is adopted, which can easily affect the communication quality of the network device receiving CG PUSCH in slot #3 in cycle #2.
  • the terminal may determine the first index, and then the terminal may determine the second index according to the first index and the first offset. For example, the terminal determines that the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit according to an instruction of the network device or a protocol agreement.
  • the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index 13 is more conducive to ensuring the communication quality of data communication when the interference is relatively strong than the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index 15, the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index 13 is used for CG PUSCH communication in slot #3 in period #2 where the interference is relatively strong, which is conducive to ensuring good communication quality.
  • the network device can also determine the modulation and coding strategy in the above manner, thereby determining the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index 13 (for example, the modulation and coding strategy level is 13) as the modulation and coding strategy for receiving CG PUSCH on slot #3 in cycle #2, and determining the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index 15 (for example, the modulation and coding strategy level is 15) as the modulation and coding strategy for receiving CG PUSCH on slot #8 in cycle #1 and cycle #2.
  • the modulation and coding strategy level is 13
  • index 15 for example, the modulation and coding strategy level is 15
  • the first index may be indicated by a network device, but the first offset is agreed upon by the protocol, and whether the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit or the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is also agreed upon by the protocol.
  • the terminal determines according to the protocol that the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit, and the first offset offset is -6.
  • the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index 16 is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit (non-SBFD slot), and the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index 10 is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit (SBFD slot).
  • the first information is used to instruct the terminal to determine the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among multiple time domain units according to a first index corresponding to a modulation and coding strategy indicated by the network device and multiple modulation and coding strategy tables.
  • multiple modulation and coding strategy tables may be agreed upon by the protocol, or may be pre-configured to the terminal by the network device (for example, before indicating the first index), and the modulation and coding strategy table may characterize the association between the modulation and coding strategy and the index.
  • each modulation and coding strategy table may be different, that is, the association between the modulation and coding strategy and the index may be different.
  • the network device indicates a first index to the terminal, and the terminal may determine different modulation and coding strategies in each modulation and coding strategy table according to the first index. Accordingly, the terminal may determine the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit, and ensure that the modulation and coding strategies for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit are different.
  • the modulation and coding strategy table may be determined according to a protocol agreement, or may be indicated by a network device.
  • the network device may indicate multiple modulation and coding strategy tables to the terminal via RRC signaling (also referred to as an RRC message).
  • the multiple modulation coding strategy tables are two modulation coding strategy tables, wherein the modulation coding strategy corresponding to the first index in one modulation coding strategy table is the modulation coding strategy for data communication on a first type of time domain unit, and the modulation coding strategy corresponding to the first index in another modulation coding strategy table is the modulation coding strategy for data communication on a second type of time domain unit.
  • two modulation and coding strategy tables are pre-stored in the terminal, and the network device can indicate a first index index#1 to the terminal through the first indication information.
  • the two modulation and coding strategy tables are MCS table#1 and MCS table#2. Then, the terminal can determine the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index#1 in MCS table#1, such as MCS level 13, and determine the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index#1 in MCS table#2, such as MCS level 15.
  • the network device can indicate to the terminal the association relationship between the two modulation and coding strategy tables and the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit, or the terminal can determine the association relationship between the two modulation and coding strategy tables and the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit based on protocol agreement.
  • the association relationship between the two modulation and coding strategy tables and the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit includes: MCS table#1 is associated with the first type of time domain unit, and MCS table#2 is associated with the second type of time domain unit. Then the modulation and coding strategy determined by the terminal in MCS table#1 according to the first index can be used as the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication in the first type of time domain unit, and the modulation and coding strategy determined in MCS table#2 according to the first index can be used as the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication in the second type of time domain unit.
  • the first information is used to instruct the terminal to determine a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among a plurality of time domain units according to a plurality of first indexes corresponding to a plurality of modulation and coding strategies.
  • the network device can indicate multiple first indexes to the terminal through the first indication information, where one first index can correspond to a modulation and coding strategy.
  • the terminal can then determine multiple modulation and coding strategies based on the multiple first indexes, and further determine the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication in the first type of time domain unit and the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication in the second type of time domain unit from the multiple modulation and coding strategies, thereby determining the modulation and coding strategy for data communication in at least one time domain unit.
  • the multiple first indexes are two first indexes, wherein the modulation coding strategy corresponding to one first index is the modulation coding strategy for data communication on a first type of time domain unit, and the modulation coding strategy corresponding to another first index is the modulation coding strategy for data communication on a second type of time domain unit.
  • data communication includes PUSCH repetition
  • the network device can carry two modulation and coding strategy indication information (MCS indication) in the uplink grant (UL grant) scheduling PUSCH, such as the first indexes of two modulation and coding strategies, index#1 and index#2 respectively.
  • MCS indication modulation and coding strategy indication information
  • the terminal can determine the modulation and coding strategy MCS#1 corresponding to index#1, and determine the modulation and coding strategy MCS#2 corresponding to index#2. Since MCS#1 and MCS#2 can be different, the terminal can determine the modulation and coding strategies for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit, and ensure that the modulation and coding strategies for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit are different.
  • the network device can indicate to the terminal the association relationship between the two first indexes and the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit, or the terminal can determine the association relationship between the two first indexes and the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit based on protocol agreement.
  • the association relationship between the two first indexes and the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit may include at least one of the following: associating the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit respectively according to the index from small to large; associating the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit respectively according to the index from large to small.
  • the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit are associated respectively.
  • Index#1 can be associated with the first type of time domain unit, and the modulation and coding strategy MCS#1 corresponding to index#1 can be used as the modulation and coding strategy in the first type.
  • index#2 can be associated with the second type of time domain unit, then the modulation and coding strategy MCS#2 corresponding to index#2 can be used as the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication in the second type of time domain unit.
  • the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the first type of time domain unit determined by the terminal and the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the first type of time domain unit determined by the network device are the same, and accordingly, the terminal and the network device can use the same modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit.
  • the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the second type of time domain unit determined by the terminal and the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the second type of time domain unit determined by the network device are also the same, and accordingly, the terminal and the network device can use the same modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit.
  • the way in which the network device determines the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among multiple time domain units and the way in which the terminal determines the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among multiple time domain units may correspond.
  • the terminal determines the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the second type of time domain unit according to the first index and the first offset indicated by the network device, and the network device may also determine the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the second type of time domain unit according to the first index and the first offset indicated to the terminal; for example, the terminal determines the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the second type of time domain unit according to the multiple first indexes indicated by the network device, and the network device may also determine the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the second type of time domain unit according to the multiple first indexes and the first offset indicated to the terminal.
  • the network device may also determine the modulation and
  • the names of information, etc. are not limited to the names recorded in the embodiments, and terms such as “information”, “message”, “signal”, “signaling”, “report”, “configuration”, “indication”, “instruction”, “command”, “channel”, “parameter”, “domain”, “field”, “symbol”, “symbol”, “code element”, “codebook”, “codeword”, “codepoint”, “bit”, “data”, “program”, and “chip” can be used interchangeably.
  • codebook can be a collection of one or more codewords/precoding matrices.
  • terms such as “uplink”, “uplink”, “physical uplink” can be interchangeable, and terms such as “downlink”, “downlink”, “physical downlink” can be interchangeable, and terms such as “side”, “sidelink”, “side communication”, “sidelink communication”, “direct connection”, “direct link”, “direct communication”, “direct link communication” can be interchangeable.
  • DCI downlink control information
  • DL downlink
  • UL uplink
  • UL DCI uplink
  • the terms “physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH)”, “DL data” and the like can be interchangeable with each other, and the terms “physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH)”, “UL data” and the like can be interchangeable with each other.
  • radio wireless
  • RAN radio access network
  • AN access network
  • RAN-based and the like
  • the term "frame”, “radio frame”, “subframe”, The terms “slot”, “sub-slot”, “mini-slot”, “symbol”, “symbol”, “transmission time interval (TTI)” and the like are interchangeable.
  • obtain can be interchangeable, and can be interpreted as receiving from other entities, obtaining from protocols, obtaining from high levels, obtaining by self-processing, autonomous implementation, etc.
  • the present disclosure also provides embodiments of a terminal and a network device.
  • An embodiment of the present disclosure further proposes a terminal, comprising: one or more processors; wherein the terminal is used to execute the modulation and coding strategy determination method described in the first aspect and the optional embodiment of the first aspect.
  • Fig. 10 is a schematic block diagram of a terminal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in Fig. 10 , the terminal includes: a processing module 1001 .
  • the processing module is used to determine a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among multiple time domain units based on the first information, wherein the multiple time domain units include a first type of time domain unit configured with a subband and a second type of time domain unit not configured with a subband.
  • the data communication includes at least one of the following:
  • a physical uplink shared channel that is repeatedly transmitted over multiple time domain units
  • a physical downlink shared channel is received in a triggered manner on multiple time domain units.
  • the first information is used to indicate that the terminal determines a first modulation and coding strategy for data communication on a first type of time domain unit and a second modulation and coding strategy for data communication on a second type of time domain unit based on a first offset and a first index corresponding to a modulation and coding strategy indicated by a network device.
  • the processing module is configured to determine that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index, and the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is the second modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the second index, wherein the second index is determined based on the first index and the first offset; or, determine that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index, and the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit is the second modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the second index, wherein the second index is determined based on the first index and the first offset.
  • the processing module is also configured to determine, based on the indication of the network device, that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index; or, based on the indication of the network device, determine that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index.
  • the processing module is also configured to determine, according to a protocol agreement, that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on a first type of time domain unit is a first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to a first index; or, according to a protocol agreement, determine that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on a second type of time domain unit is a first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to a first index.
  • the first offset is determined based on a protocol agreement or is indicated by a network device.
  • the first information is used to instruct the terminal to determine a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among a plurality of time domain units according to a plurality of first indexes corresponding to a plurality of modulation and coding strategies.
  • the multiple first indexes are two first indexes, wherein the modulation coding strategy corresponding to one first index is the modulation coding strategy for data communication on a first type of time domain unit, and the modulation coding strategy corresponding to another first index is the modulation coding strategy for data communication on a second type of time domain unit.
  • the first information is used to instruct the terminal to determine the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among multiple time domain units according to a first index corresponding to a modulation and coding strategy indicated by the network device and multiple modulation and coding strategy tables.
  • the multiple modulation coding strategy tables are two modulation coding strategy tables, wherein the modulation coding strategy corresponding to the first index in one modulation coding strategy table is the modulation coding strategy for data communication on a first type of time domain unit, and the modulation coding strategy corresponding to the first index in another modulation coding strategy table is the modulation coding strategy for data communication on a second type of time domain unit.
  • the sub-band includes at least one of the following: an uplink sub-band; a downlink sub-band.
  • the first information includes at least one of the following: rules agreed upon by a protocol; signaling of a network device.
  • the terminal may also include other modules in some embodiments, for example, at least one of the following: a sending module, a receiving module, a storage module, and a display module.
  • An embodiment of the present disclosure further proposes a network device, comprising: one or more processors; wherein the network device is used to execute the modulation and coding strategy determination method described in the second aspect and the optional embodiment of the second aspect.
  • Fig. 11 is a schematic block diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in Fig. 11 , the network device includes: a sending module 1101 .
  • the sending module is used to send first information to the terminal, wherein the first information is used to determine a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among multiple time domain units, and the multiple time domain units include a first type of time domain unit configured with a subband and a second type of time domain unit not configured with a subband.
  • the data communication includes at least one of the following:
  • a physical uplink shared channel that is repeatedly transmitted over multiple time domain units
  • a physical downlink shared channel is received in a triggered manner on multiple time domain units.
  • the first information is used to indicate that the terminal determines a first modulation and coding strategy for data communication on a first type of time domain unit and a second modulation and coding strategy for data communication on a second type of time domain unit based on a first offset and a first index corresponding to a modulation and coding strategy indicated by a network device.
  • the sending module is further configured to: instruct the terminal to determine that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index; or, instruct the terminal to determine that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index.
  • the first offset is determined based on a protocol agreement or is indicated by a network device.
  • the first information is used to instruct the terminal to determine a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among a plurality of time domain units according to a plurality of first indexes corresponding to a plurality of modulation and coding strategies.
  • the multiple first indexes are two first indexes, wherein the modulation coding strategy corresponding to one first index is the modulation coding strategy for data communication on a first type of time domain unit, and the modulation coding strategy corresponding to another first index is the modulation coding strategy for data communication on a second type of time domain unit.
  • the first information is used to instruct the terminal to determine the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among multiple time domain units according to a first index corresponding to a modulation and coding strategy indicated by the network device and multiple modulation and coding strategy tables.
  • the multiple modulation coding strategy tables are two modulation coding strategy tables, wherein the modulation coding strategy corresponding to the first index in one modulation coding strategy table is the modulation coding strategy for data communication on a first type of time domain unit, and the modulation coding strategy corresponding to the first index in another modulation coding strategy table is the modulation coding strategy for data communication on a second type of time domain unit.
  • the sub-band includes at least one of the following: an uplink sub-band; a downlink sub-band.
  • the network device may also include other modules in some embodiments, for example, at least one of the following: a processing module, a receiving module, a storage module, and a display module.
  • the relevant parts refer to the partial description of the method embodiment.
  • the device embodiment described above is only schematic, wherein the modules described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as modules may or may not be physical modules, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network modules. Some or all of the modules may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the scheme of this embodiment. Ordinary technicians in this field can understand and implement it without paying creative work.
  • An embodiment of the present disclosure also proposes a method for determining a modulation and coding strategy, the method comprising: a network device sends first information to a terminal; the terminal determines a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among multiple time domain units based on the first information, wherein the multiple time domain units include a first type of time domain unit configured with a subband and a second type of time domain unit not configured with a subband.
  • An embodiment of the present disclosure further proposes a communication device, comprising: one or more processors; wherein the processor is used to call instructions so that the communication device executes the modulation and coding strategy determination method described in any of the above embodiments.
  • An embodiment of the present disclosure further proposes a communication system, including a terminal, an access network device, and a core network device, wherein the terminal is configured to implement the modulation and coding strategy determination method described in any of the above embodiments.
  • An embodiment of the present disclosure further proposes a storage medium storing instructions, which, when executed on a communication device, enables the communication device to execute the modulation and coding strategy determination method described in any of the above embodiments.
  • the embodiments of the present disclosure also propose a device for implementing any of the above methods, for example, a device is proposed, the above device includes a unit or module for implementing each step performed by the terminal in any of the above methods.
  • a device is also proposed, including a unit or module for implementing each step performed by a network device (such as an access network device, a core network function node, a core network device, etc.) in any of the above methods.
  • a network device such as an access network device, a core network function node, a core network device, etc.
  • the division of the units or modules in the above device is only a division of logical functions. In actual implementation, they can be fully or partially integrated into one physical entity, or they can be physically separated.
  • the units or modules in the device can be implemented in the form of a processor calling software: for example, the device includes a processor, the processor is connected to a memory, and the memory Instructions are stored in the memory, and the processor calls the instructions stored in the memory to implement any of the above methods or implement the functions of each unit or module of the above device, wherein the processor is, for example, a general-purpose processor, such as a central processing unit (CPU) or a microprocessor, and the memory is a memory in the device or a memory outside the device.
  • CPU central processing unit
  • microprocessor a microprocessor
  • the unit or module in the device can be implemented in the form of a hardware circuit, and the functions of some or all of the units or modules can be implemented by designing the hardware circuit.
  • the above hardware circuit can be understood as one or more processors; for example, in one implementation, the above hardware circuit is an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), and the functions of some or all of the above units or modules are implemented by designing the logical relationship of the components in the circuit; for example, in another implementation, the above hardware circuit can be implemented by a programmable logic device (PLD), taking a field programmable gate array (FPGA) as an example, which can include a large number of logic gate circuits, and the connection relationship between the logic gate circuits is configured by a configuration file, so as to implement the functions of some or all of the above units or modules. All units or modules of the above devices may be implemented entirely in the form of a processor calling software, or entirely in the form of a hardware circuit, or partially in the form of a processor calling software and the rest in the form of a hardware circuit.
  • the processor is a circuit with signal processing capability.
  • the processor may be a circuit with instruction reading and running capability, such as a central processing unit (CPU), a microprocessor, a graphics processing unit (GPU) (which may be understood as a microprocessor), or a digital signal processor (DSP); in another implementation, the processor may implement certain functions through the logical relationship of a hardware circuit, and the logical relationship of the above hardware circuit may be fixed or reconfigurable, such as a hardware circuit implemented by an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC) or a programmable logic device (PLD), such as an FPGA.
  • ASIC application-specific integrated circuit
  • PLD programmable logic device
  • the process of the processor loading a configuration document to implement the hardware circuit configuration may be understood as the process of the processor loading instructions to implement the functions of some or all of the above units or modules.
  • it can also be a hardware circuit designed for artificial intelligence, which can be understood as ASIC, such as Neural Network Processing Unit (NPU), Tensor Processing Unit (TPU), Deep Learning Processing Unit (DPU), etc.
  • ASIC Neural Network Processing Unit
  • NPU Neural Network Processing Unit
  • TPU Tensor Processing Unit
  • DPU Deep Learning Processing Unit
  • FIG12 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device 12100 proposed in an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the communication device 12100 may be a network device (e.g., an access network device, a core network device, etc.), or a terminal (e.g., a user device, etc.), or a chip, a chip system, or a processor that supports a network device to implement any of the above methods, or a chip, a chip system, or a processor that supports a terminal to implement any of the above methods.
  • the communication device 12100 may be used to implement the method described in the above method embodiment, and the details may refer to the description in the above method embodiment.
  • the communication device 12100 includes one or more processors 12101.
  • the processor 12101 may be a general-purpose processor or a dedicated processor, for example, a baseband processor or a central processing unit.
  • the baseband processor may be used to process the communication protocol and the communication data
  • the central processing unit may be used to control the communication device (such as a base station, a baseband chip, a terminal device, a terminal device chip, a DU or a CU, etc.), execute a program, and process the data of the program.
  • the processor 12101 is used to call instructions so that the communication device 12100 executes any of the above methods.
  • the communication device 12100 further includes one or more memories 12102 for storing instructions.
  • the memory 12102 may also be outside the communication device 12100.
  • the communication device 12100 further includes one or more transceivers 12103.
  • the communication steps such as sending and receiving in the above method are performed by the transceiver 12103, and the other steps are performed by the processor 12101.
  • the transceiver may include a receiver and a transmitter, and the receiver and the transmitter may be separate or integrated.
  • the terms transceiver, transceiver unit, transceiver, transceiver circuit, etc. may be interchangeable, and the terms transmitter, transmission unit, transmitter, transmission circuit, etc. may be interchangeable.
  • the receiver, receiving unit, transmitter, etc. may be interchangeable.
  • the terms element, receiver, receiving circuit, etc. are used interchangeably.
  • the communication device 12100 further includes one or more interface circuits 12104, which are connected to the memory 12102.
  • the interface circuit 12104 can be used to receive signals from the memory 12102 or other devices, and can be used to send signals to the memory 12102 or other devices.
  • the interface circuit 12104 can read instructions stored in the memory 12102 and send the instructions to the processor 12101.
  • the communication device 12100 described in the above embodiments may be a network device or a terminal, but the scope of the communication device 12100 described in the present disclosure is not limited thereto, and the structure of the communication device 12100 may not be limited by FIG. 12.
  • the communication device may be an independent device or may be part of a larger device.
  • the communication device may be: 1) an independent integrated circuit IC, or a chip, or a chip system or subsystem; (2) a collection of one or more ICs, optionally, the above IC collection may also include a storage component for storing data and programs; (3) an ASIC, such as a modulation encoder (Modem); (4) a module that can be embedded in other devices; (5) a receiver, a terminal device, an intelligent terminal device, a cellular phone, a wireless device, a handheld device, a mobile unit, a vehicle-mounted device, a network device, a cloud device, an artificial intelligence device, etc.; (6) others, etc.
  • a modulation encoder Modem
  • Fig. 13 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a chip 13200 provided in an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the communication device 12100 may be a chip or a chip system
  • the chip 13200 includes one or more processors 13201, and the processor 13201 is used to call instructions so that the chip 13200 executes any of the above methods.
  • the chip 13200 further includes one or more interface circuits 13202, the interface circuits 13202 are connected to the memory 13203, the interface circuits 13202 can be used to receive signals from the memory 13203 or other devices, and the interface circuits 13202 can be used to send signals to the memory
  • the interface circuit 13202 can read the instructions stored in the memory 13203 and send the instructions to the processor 13201.
  • the terms such as interface circuit, interface, transceiver pin, transceiver, etc. can be replaced with each other.
  • the chip 13200 further includes one or more memories 13203 for storing instructions.
  • the memory 13203 may be outside the chip 13200.
  • the present disclosure also proposes a storage medium, on which instructions are stored, and when the instructions are executed on the communication device 12100, the communication device 12100 executes any of the above methods.
  • the storage medium is an electronic storage medium.
  • the storage medium is a computer-readable storage medium, but is not limited to this, and it can also be a storage medium readable by other devices.
  • the storage medium can be a non-transitory storage medium, but is not limited to this, and it can also be a temporary storage medium.
  • the present disclosure also proposes a program product, and when the program product is executed by the communication device 12100, the communication device 12100 executes any of the above methods.
  • the program product is a computer program product.
  • the present disclosure also proposes a computer program, which, when executed on a computer, causes the computer to execute any one of the above methods.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Quality & Reliability (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

The present disclosure relates to the technical field of communications, and particularly relates to a modulation and coding scheme determination method, a communication device, and a storage medium. The modulation and coding scheme determination method comprises: according to first information, determining a modulation and coding scheme for data communication performed in at least one of a plurality of time-domain units, wherein the plurality of time-domain units comprise a first-type time-domain unit configured with a sub-band, and a second-type time-domain unit which is not configured with a sub-band. The present disclosure is conducive to alleviating the impact of interference on data communication performed in a first-type time-domain unit, thereby ensuring the communication quality of data communication performed in the first-type time-domain unit.

Description

调制编码策略确定方法、通信设备、存储介质Modulation coding strategy determination method, communication device, and storage medium 技术领域Technical Field

本公开涉及通信技术领域,具体而言,涉及调制编码策略确定方法、终端、网络设备、通信设备、通信系统和存储介质。The present disclosure relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a modulation and coding strategy determination method, a terminal, a network device, a communication device, a communication system and a storage medium.

背景技术Background Art

网络设备可以在时域单元中与终端通信,在一个时隙单元中,网络设备只能进行上行通信或者下行通信。为了提高通信效率,可以使得网络设备在一个时隙单元中既能进行上行通信,又能进行下行通信,从而实现网络设备的全双工通信,但是在全双工通信场景下,会存在一些技术问题。Network devices can communicate with terminals in time domain units. In a time slot unit, network devices can only perform uplink or downlink communication. In order to improve communication efficiency, network devices can perform both uplink and downlink communication in a time slot unit, thereby achieving full-duplex communication of network devices. However, in the full-duplex communication scenario, there will be some technical problems.

发明内容Summary of the invention

本公开的实施例提出了调制编码策略确定方法、通信设备、存储介质,以解决相关技术中在时域单元中配置有子带的通信场景下的技术问题。The embodiments of the present disclosure propose a modulation and coding strategy determination method, a communication device, and a storage medium to solve the technical problems in the related art in a communication scenario where subbands are configured in a time domain unit.

根据本公开实施例的第一方面,提出一种调制编码策略确定方法,由终端执行,所述方法包括:根据第一信息确定在多个时域单元中的至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,其中,所述多个时域单元包括配置有子带的第一类时域单元和未配置子带的第二类时域单元。According to a first aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure, a modulation coding strategy determination method is proposed, which is executed by a terminal, and the method includes: determining a modulation coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among multiple time domain units based on first information, wherein the multiple time domain units include a first type of time domain unit configured with a subband and a second type of time domain unit not configured with a subband.

根据本公开实施例的第二方面,提出一种调制编码策略确定方法,由网络设备执行,所述方法包括:向终端发送第一信息,其中,所述第一信息用于确定在多个时域单元中的至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,所述多个时域单元包括配置有子带的第一类时域单元和未配置子带的第二类时域单元。According to the second aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure, a method for determining a modulation and coding strategy is proposed, which is executed by a network device, and the method includes: sending first information to a terminal, wherein the first information is used to determine a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among multiple time domain units, and the multiple time domain units include a first type of time domain unit configured with a subband and a second type of time domain unit not configured with a subband.

根据本公开实施例的第三方面,提出一种调制编码策略确定方法,所述方法包括:网络设备向终端发送第一信息;终端根据所述第一信息确定在多个时域单元中的至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,其中,所述多个时域单元包括配置有子带的第一类时域单元和未配置子带的第二类时域单元。According to the third aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure, a method for determining a modulation and coding strategy is proposed, the method comprising: a network device sends first information to a terminal; the terminal determines a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among multiple time domain units based on the first information, wherein the multiple time domain units include a first type of time domain unit configured with a subband and a second type of time domain unit not configured with a subband.

根据本公开实施例的第四方面,提出一种终端,包括:一个或多个处理器;其中,所述终端用于执行上述第一方面所述的调制编码策略确定方法。According to a fourth aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure, a terminal is proposed, comprising: one or more processors; wherein the terminal is used to execute the modulation and coding strategy determination method described in the first aspect above.

根据本公开实施例的第五方面,提出一种网络设备,包括:一个或多个处理器;其中,所述网络设备用于执行上述第二方面所述的调制编码策略确定方法。According to a fifth aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure, a network device is proposed, comprising: one or more processors; wherein the network device is used to execute the modulation and coding strategy determination method described in the second aspect above.

根据本公开实施例的第六方面,提出一种通信设备,包括:一个或多个处理器;其中,所述处理器用于调用指令以使得所述通信设备执行第一方面、第二方面中任一项所述的调制编码策略确定方法。According to the sixth aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure, a communication device is proposed, comprising: one or more processors; wherein the processor is used to call instructions so that the communication device executes the modulation and coding strategy determination method described in any one of the first aspect and the second aspect.

根据本公开实施例的第七方面,提出一种通信系统,包括终端、接入网设备、核心网设备,其中,所述终端被配置为实现第一方面、第二方面中任一项所述的调制编码策略确定方法。According to the seventh aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure, a communication system is proposed, comprising a terminal, an access network device, and a core network device, wherein the terminal is configured to implement the modulation and coding strategy determination method described in any one of the first aspect and the second aspect.

根据本公开实施例的第八方面,提出一种存储介质,所述存储介质存储有指令,当所述指令在通信设备上运行时,使得所述通信设备执行第一方面、第二方面中任一项 所述的调制编码策略确定方法。According to an eighth aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure, a storage medium is provided, wherein the storage medium stores instructions, and when the instructions are executed on a communication device, the communication device executes any one of the first aspect and the second aspect. The modulation and coding strategy determination method.

根据本公开的实施例,有利于缓解干扰对第一类时域单元中数据通信的影响,进而保证在第一类时域单元中数据通信的通信质量。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, it is helpful to alleviate the influence of interference on data communication in the first type of time domain unit, thereby ensuring the communication quality of data communication in the first type of time domain unit.

附图说明BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

为了更清楚地说明本公开实施例中的技术方案,下面将对实施例描述中所需要使用的附图作简单地介绍,显而易见地,下面描述中的附图仅仅是本公开的一些实施例,对于本领域普通技术人员来讲,在不付出创造性劳动性的前提下,还可以根据这些附图获得其他的附图。In order to more clearly illustrate the technical solutions in the embodiments of the present disclosure, the drawings required for use in the description of the embodiments will be briefly introduced below. Obviously, the drawings described below are only some embodiments of the present disclosure. For ordinary technicians in this field, other drawings can be obtained based on these drawings without creative work.

图1是根据本公开实施例示出的通信系统的架构示意图。FIG1 is a schematic diagram of the architecture of a communication system according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

图2是根据本公开的实施例示出的一种调制编码策略确定方法的交互示意图。FIG2 is an interactive schematic diagram of a modulation and coding strategy determination method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

图3是根据本公开的实施例示出的一种调制编码策略确定方法的示意流程图。FIG3 is a schematic flow chart of a method for determining a modulation and coding strategy according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

图4是根据本公开的实施例示出的一种网络设备在SBFD时隙进行全双工通信的示意图。FIG4 is a schematic diagram showing a network device performing full-duplex communication in a SBFD time slot according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

图5是根据本公开的实施例示出的一种带宽部分中心频点的示意图。FIG5 is a schematic diagram showing a central frequency point of a bandwidth portion according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

图6是根据本公开的实施例示出的一种上行子带的示意图。FIG6 is a schematic diagram showing an uplink subband according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

图7是根据本公开的实施例示出的一种数据通信的示意图。FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing a data communication according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

图8是根据本公开的实施例示出的另一种数据通信的示意图。FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram showing another data communication according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

图9是根据本公开的实施例示出的一种调制编码策略确定方法的示意流程图。FIG. 9 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining a modulation and coding strategy according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

图10是根据本公开的实施例示出的一种终端的示意框图。FIG10 is a schematic block diagram of a terminal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

图11是根据本公开的实施例示出的一种网络设备的示意框图。FIG. 11 is a schematic block diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

图12是本公开实施例提出的通信设备的结构示意图。FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device proposed in an embodiment of the present disclosure.

图13是本公开实施例提出的芯片的结构示意图。FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a chip proposed in an embodiment of the present disclosure.

具体实施方式DETAILED DESCRIPTION

本公开的实施例提出了调制编码策略确定方法、终端、网络设备、通信设备、通信系统和存储介质。The embodiments of the present disclosure provide a modulation and coding strategy determination method, a terminal, a network device, a communication device, a communication system, and a storage medium.

第一方面,本公开的实施例提出了一种调制编码策略确定方法,由终端执行,所述方法包括:根据第一信息确定在多个时域单元中的至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,其中,所述多个时域单元包括配置有子带的第一类时域单元和未配置子带的第二类时域单元。In a first aspect, an embodiment of the present disclosure proposes a method for determining a modulation coding strategy, which is executed by a terminal, and the method includes: determining a modulation coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among multiple time domain units based on first information, wherein the multiple time domain units include a first type of time domain unit configured with a subband and a second type of time domain unit not configured with a subband.

在上述实施例中,终端可以在多个时域单元中与网络设备进行数据通信,在多个时域单元包括第一类时域单元和第二类时域单元的情况下,终端可以根据第一信息确定至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,其中,第一类时域单元和第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略可以不同。In the above embodiment, the terminal can communicate data with the network device in multiple time domain units. When the multiple time domain units include a first type of time domain unit and a second type of time domain unit, the terminal can determine the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit based on the first information, wherein the modulation and coding strategies for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit may be different.

据此,便于终端采用不同的调制编码策略应用于第一类时域单元和第二类时域单元上的数据通信,有利于缓解干扰对第一类时域单元中数据通信的影响,进而保证在第一类时域单元中数据通信的通信质量。 Accordingly, it is convenient for the terminal to adopt different modulation and coding strategies for data communication in the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit, which is conducive to alleviating the impact of interference on data communication in the first type of time domain unit, and thus ensuring the communication quality of data communication in the first type of time domain unit.

结合第一方面的一些实施例。在一些实施例中,所述数据通信包括以下至少之一:In combination with some embodiments of the first aspect. In some embodiments, the data communication includes at least one of the following:

在所述多个时域单元上重复接收的物理下行共享信道;Repeating the received physical downlink shared channel on the multiple time domain units;

在所述多个时域单元上重复发送的物理上行共享信道;A physical uplink shared channel repeatedly transmitted on the plurality of time domain units;

在所述多个时域单元上基于配置授权方式发送的物理上行共享信道;A physical uplink shared channel sent in a configuration authorization manner on the multiple time domain units;

在所述多个时域单元上基于触发方式接收的物理下行共享信道。A physical downlink shared channel is received on the multiple time domain units based on a triggering manner.

在上述实施例中,本实施例所述的方法可以适用于多种数据通信场景,便于拓展实施。In the above embodiment, the method described in this embodiment can be applied to a variety of data communication scenarios, which is convenient for expansion and implementation.

结合第一方面的一些实施例。在一些实施例中,所述第一信息用于指示所述终端根据一个第一偏移量以及网络设备指示的一个调制编码策略对应的一个第一索引,确定在所述第一类时域单元上数据通信的第一调制编码策略以及在所述第二类时域单元数据通信的第二调制编码策略。In combination with some embodiments of the first aspect. In some embodiments, the first information is used to instruct the terminal to determine a first modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and a second modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit based on a first offset and a first index corresponding to a modulation and coding strategy indicated by a network device.

在上述实施例中,便于终端确定在所述第一类时域单元上数据通信的第一调制编码策略以及在所述第二类时域单元数据通信的第二调制编码策略。In the above embodiment, it is convenient for the terminal to determine the first modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and the second modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit.

结合第一方面的一些实施例。在一些实施例中,所述根据第一信息确定在多个时域单元中的至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,包括:确定在所述第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为所述第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略,在所述第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为第二索引对应的第二调制编码策略,其中,所述第二索引根据所述第一索引和所述第一偏移量确定;或者,确定在所述第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为所述第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略,在所述第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为第二索引对应的第二调制编码策略,其中,所述第二索引根据所述第一索引和所述第一偏移量确定。In combination with some embodiments of the first aspect. In some embodiments, determining the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among multiple time domain units according to the first information includes: determining that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index, and the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is the second modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the second index, wherein the second index is determined according to the first index and the first offset; or determining that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index, and the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit is the second modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the second index, wherein the second index is determined according to the first index and the first offset.

在上述实施例中,便于终端确定是两个索引分别对应的调制编码策略,作为两类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。In the above embodiment, it is convenient for the terminal to determine the modulation and coding strategies corresponding to the two indexes respectively as the modulation and coding strategies for data communication on the two types of time domain units.

结合第一方面的一些实施例。在一些实施例中,调制编码策略确定方法还包括:根据网络设备的指示确定在所述第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为所述第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略;或者,根据网络设备的指示确定在所述第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为所述第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略。In combination with some embodiments of the first aspect. In some embodiments, the method for determining a modulation and coding strategy further includes: determining, according to an instruction of a network device, that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index; or determining, according to an instruction of a network device, that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index.

在上述实施例中,便于终端根据网络设备的指示确定第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略,具体为哪类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。In the above embodiment, it is convenient for the terminal to determine the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index according to the instruction of the network device, specifically, the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on which type of time domain unit.

结合第一方面的一些实施例。在一些实施例中,调制编码策略确定方法还包括:根据协议约定确定在所述第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为所述第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略;或者,根据协议约定确定在所述第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为所述第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略。In combination with some embodiments of the first aspect. In some embodiments, the method for determining the modulation and coding strategy also includes: determining, according to a protocol agreement, that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index; or determining, according to a protocol agreement, that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index.

在上述实施例中,便于终端根据协议约定确定第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略,具体为哪类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。In the above embodiment, it is convenient for the terminal to determine the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index according to the protocol agreement, specifically, the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on which type of time domain unit.

结合第一方面的一些实施例。在一些实施例中,所述第一偏移量为基于协议约定确定的,或者为网络设备指示的。In combination with some embodiments of the first aspect, in some embodiments, the first offset is determined based on a protocol agreement, or is indicated by a network device.

结合第一方面的一些实施例。在一些实施例中,所述第一信息用于指示所述终端根据多个调制编码策略对应的多个第一索引,确定在所述多个时域单元中的至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。 In combination with some embodiments of the first aspect, in some embodiments, the first information is used to instruct the terminal to determine a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among the multiple time domain units according to multiple first indexes corresponding to multiple modulation and coding strategies.

在上述实施例中,终端确定至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,基于多个第一索引即可,而不必考虑第一偏移量,便于确定多个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。In the above embodiment, the terminal determines the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit based on multiple first indexes without considering the first offset, which facilitates determining the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on multiple time domain units.

结合第一方面的一些实施例。在一些实施例中,所述多个第一索引为两个第一索引,其中,一个第一索引对应的调制编码策略为在所述第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,另一个第一索引对应的调制编码策略为在所述第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。In combination with some embodiments of the first aspect. In some embodiments, the multiple first indices are two first indices, wherein the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to one first index is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit, and the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the other first index is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit.

结合第一方面的一些实施例。在一些实施例中,所述第一信息用于指示所述终端根据网络设备指示的一个调制编码策略对应的一个第一索引和多个调制编码策略表确定在所述多个时域单元中的至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。In combination with some embodiments of the first aspect. In some embodiments, the first information is used to instruct the terminal to determine the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among the multiple time domain units according to a first index corresponding to a modulation and coding strategy indicated by a network device and multiple modulation and coding strategy tables.

在上述实施例中,终端确定至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,可以基于一个第一索引和多个调制编码策略表实现,而不必基于多个第一索引实现,有利于节约网络设备指示索引的资源。In the above embodiment, the terminal determines the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit based on a first index and multiple modulation and coding strategy tables, rather than multiple first indexes, which is beneficial to saving resources of network device indication indexes.

结合第一方面的一些实施例。在一些实施例中,所述多个调制编码策略表为两个调制编码策略表,其中,所述第一索引在一个调制编码策略表中对应的调制编码策略为在所述第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,所述第一索引在另一个调制编码策略表中对应的调制编码策略为在所述第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。In combination with some embodiments of the first aspect. In some embodiments, the multiple modulation and coding strategy tables are two modulation and coding strategy tables, wherein the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index in one modulation and coding strategy table is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit, and the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index in another modulation and coding strategy table is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit.

结合第一方面的一些实施例。在一些实施例中,所述子带包括以下至少之一:上行子带;下行子带。In combination with some embodiments of the first aspect, in some embodiments, the subband includes at least one of the following: an uplink subband; a downlink subband.

结合第一方面的一些实施例。在一些实施例中,所述第一信息包括以下至少之一:协议约定的规则;网络设备的信令。In combination with some embodiments of the first aspect, in some embodiments, the first information includes at least one of the following: a rule agreed upon by a protocol; or a signaling of a network device.

第二方面,本公开的实施例提出了一种调制编码策略确定方法,由网络设备执行,所述方法包括:向终端发送第一信息,其中,所述第一信息用于确定在多个时域单元中的至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,所述多个时域单元包括配置有子带的第一类时域单元和未配置子带的第二类时域单元。In the second aspect, an embodiment of the present disclosure proposes a method for determining a modulation and coding strategy, which is executed by a network device, and the method includes: sending first information to a terminal, wherein the first information is used to determine a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among multiple time domain units, and the multiple time domain units include a first type of time domain unit configured with a subband and a second type of time domain unit not configured with a subband.

在上述实施例中,In the above embodiment,

结合第二方面的一些实施例。在一些实施例中,所述数据通信包括以下至少之一:In combination with some embodiments of the second aspect. In some embodiments, the data communication includes at least one of the following:

在所述多个时域单元上重复接收的物理下行共享信道;Repeating the received physical downlink shared channel on the multiple time domain units;

在所述多个时域单元上重复发送的物理上行共享信道;A physical uplink shared channel repeatedly transmitted on the plurality of time domain units;

在所述多个时域单元上基于配置授权方式发送的物理上行共享信道;A physical uplink shared channel sent in a configuration authorization manner on the multiple time domain units;

在所述多个时域单元上基于触发方式接收的物理下行共享信道。A physical downlink shared channel is received on the multiple time domain units based on a triggering manner.

结合第二方面的一些实施例。在一些实施例中,所述第一信息用于指示所述终端根据一个第一偏移量以及网络设备指示的一个调制编码策略对应的一个第一索引,确定在所述第一类时域单元上数据通信的第一调制编码策略以及在所述第二类时域单元数据通信的第二调制编码策略。In combination with some embodiments of the second aspect. In some embodiments, the first information is used to instruct the terminal to determine a first modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and a second modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit based on a first offset and a first index corresponding to a modulation and coding strategy indicated by a network device.

结合第二方面的一些实施例。在一些实施例中,调制编码策略确定方法还包括:指示所述终端确定在所述第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为所述第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略;或者,指示所述终端确定在所述第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为所述第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略。 In combination with some embodiments of the second aspect. In some embodiments, the modulation and coding strategy determination method further includes: instructing the terminal to determine that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index; or, instructing the terminal to determine that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index.

结合第二方面的一些实施例。在一些实施例中,所述第一偏移量为基于协议约定确定的,或者为所述网络设备指示的。In combination with some embodiments of the second aspect, in some embodiments, the first offset is determined based on a protocol agreement, or is indicated by the network device.

结合第二方面的一些实施例。在一些实施例中,所述第一信息用于指示所述终端根据多个调制编码策略对应的多个第一索引,确定在所述多个时域单元中的至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。In combination with some embodiments of the second aspect, in some embodiments, the first information is used to instruct the terminal to determine a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among the multiple time domain units according to multiple first indexes corresponding to multiple modulation and coding strategies.

结合第二方面的一些实施例。在一些实施例中,所述多个第一索引为两个第一索引,其中,一个第一索引对应的调制编码策略为在所述第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,另一个第一索引对应的调制编码策略为在所述第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。In combination with some embodiments of the second aspect. In some embodiments, the multiple first indices are two first indices, wherein the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to one first index is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit, and the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the other first index is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit.

结合第二方面的一些实施例。在一些实施例中,所述第一信息用于指示所述终端根据网络设备指示的一个调制编码策略对应的一个第一索引和多个调制编码策略表确定在所述多个时域单元中的至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。In combination with some embodiments of the second aspect. In some embodiments, the first information is used to instruct the terminal to determine the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among the multiple time domain units according to a first index corresponding to a modulation and coding strategy indicated by a network device and multiple modulation and coding strategy tables.

结合第二方面的一些实施例。在一些实施例中,所述多个调制编码策略表为两个调制编码策略表,其中,所述第一索引在一个调制编码策略表中对应的调制编码策略为在所述第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,所述第一索引在另一个调制编码策略表中对应的调制编码策略为在所述第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。In combination with some embodiments of the second aspect. In some embodiments, the multiple modulation and coding strategy tables are two modulation and coding strategy tables, wherein the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index in one modulation and coding strategy table is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit, and the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index in another modulation and coding strategy table is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit.

结合第二方面的一些实施例。在一些实施例中,所述子带包括以下至少之一:上行子带;下行子带。In combination with some embodiments of the second aspect, in some embodiments, the subband includes at least one of the following: an uplink subband; a downlink subband.

第三方面,本公开的实施例提出了一种调制编码策略确定方法,所述方法包括:网络设备向终端发送第一信息;终端根据所述第一信息确定在多个时域单元中的至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,其中,所述多个时域单元包括配置有子带的第一类时域单元和未配置子带的第二类时域单元。In the third aspect, an embodiment of the present disclosure proposes a method for determining a modulation and coding strategy, the method comprising: a network device sends first information to a terminal; the terminal determines a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among multiple time domain units based on the first information, wherein the multiple time domain units include a first type of time domain unit configured with a subband and a second type of time domain unit not configured with a subband.

第四方面,本公开的实施例提出了一种终端,包括:一个或多个处理器;其中,所述终端用于执行第一方面、第一方面的可选实现方式所描述的调制编码策略确定方法。In a fourth aspect, an embodiment of the present disclosure proposes a terminal, comprising: one or more processors; wherein the terminal is used to execute the modulation and coding strategy determination method described in the first aspect and the optional implementation method of the first aspect.

第五方面,本公开的实施例提出了一种网络设备,包括:一个或多个处理器;其中,所述网络设备用于执行第而方面、第二方面的可选实现方式所描述的调制编码策略确定方法。In a fifth aspect, an embodiment of the present disclosure proposes a network device, comprising: one or more processors; wherein the network device is used to execute the modulation and coding strategy determination method described in the first aspect and the optional implementation method of the second aspect.

第六方面,本公开实施例提出了通信设备,上述通信设备包括:一个或多个处理器;用于存储指令的一个或多个存储器;其中,上述处理器用于调用上述指令以使得上述通信设备执行如第一方面和第二方面、第一方面和第二方面的可选实现方式所描述的xx方法。In a sixth aspect, an embodiment of the present disclosure proposes a communication device, wherein the communication device includes: one or more processors; one or more memories for storing instructions; wherein the processor is used to call the instructions so that the communication device executes the xx method described in the first and second aspects, and the optional implementation methods of the first and second aspects.

第七方面,本公开实施例提出了通信系统,上述通信系统包括:终端、接入网设备、核心网设备;其中,上述终端被配置为执行如第一方面和第二方面、第一方面和第二方面的可选实现方式所描述的方法,上述网络设备被配置为执行如第一方面和第二方面、第一方面和第二方面的可选实现方式所描述的方法。In the seventh aspect, an embodiment of the present disclosure proposes a communication system, which includes: a terminal, an access network device, and a core network device; wherein the terminal is configured to execute the method described in the first aspect and the second aspect, and the optional implementation of the first aspect and the second aspect, and the network device is configured to execute the method described in the first aspect and the second aspect, and the optional implementation of the first aspect and the second aspect.

第八方面,本公开实施例提出了存储介质,上述存储介质存储有指令,当上述指令在通信设备上运行时,使得上述通信设备执行如第一方面和第二方面、第一方面和第二方面的可选实现方式所描述的方法。In an eighth aspect, an embodiment of the present disclosure proposes a storage medium, wherein the storage medium stores instructions. When the instructions are executed on a communication device, the communication device executes the method described in the first and second aspects, and the optional implementation methods of the first and second aspects.

第九方面,本公开实施例提出了程序产品,上述程序产品被通信设备执行时,使得上述通信设备执行如第一方面和第二方面、第一方面和第二方面的可选实现方式所描述的方法。 In a ninth aspect, an embodiment of the present disclosure proposes a program product. When the program product is executed by a communication device, the communication device executes the method described in the first and second aspects and the optional implementation methods of the first and second aspects.

第十方面,本公开实施例提出了计算机程序,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如第一方面和第二方面、第一方面和第二方面的可选实现方式所描述的方法。In a tenth aspect, an embodiment of the present disclosure proposes a computer program, which, when executed on a computer, enables the computer to execute the method described in the first and second aspects, and the optional implementations of the first and second aspects.

可以理解地,上述终端、网络设备、通信设备、通信系统、存储介质、程序产品、计算机程序均用于执行本公开实施例所提出的方法。因此,其所能达到的有益效果可以参考对应方法中的有益效果,此处不再赘述。It is understandable that the above-mentioned terminals, network devices, communication devices, communication systems, storage media, program products, and computer programs are all used to execute the methods proposed in the embodiments of the present disclosure. Therefore, the beneficial effects that can be achieved can refer to the beneficial effects in the corresponding methods, which will not be repeated here.

本公开实施例提出了调制编码策略确定方法、通信设备、存储介质。在一些实施例中,调制编码策略确定方法与信息处理方法、通信方法等术语可以相互替换,终端、网络设备与信息处理装置、通信装置等术语可以相互替换,信息处理系统、通信系统等术语可以相互替换。The embodiments of the present disclosure propose a modulation and coding strategy determination method, a communication device, and a storage medium. In some embodiments, the terms such as modulation and coding strategy determination method, information processing method, and communication method can be replaced with each other, the terms such as terminal, network device, information processing device, and communication device can be replaced with each other, and the terms such as information processing system and communication system can be replaced with each other.

本公开实施例并非穷举,仅为部分实施例的示意,不作为对本公开保护范围的具体限制。在不矛盾的情况下,某一实施例中的每个步骤均可以作为独立实施例来实施,且各步骤之间可以任意组合,例如,在某一实施例中去除部分步骤后的方案也可以作为独立实施例来实施,且在某一实施例中各步骤的顺序可以任意交换,另外,某一实施例中的可选实现方式可以任意组合;此外,各实施例之间可以任意组合,例如,不同实施例的部分或全部步骤可以任意组合,某一实施例可以与其他实施例的可选实现方式任意组合。The embodiments of the present disclosure are not exhaustive, but are only illustrative of some embodiments, and are not intended to be a specific limitation on the scope of protection of the present disclosure. In the absence of contradiction, each step in a certain embodiment can be implemented as an independent embodiment, and the steps can be arbitrarily combined. For example, a solution after removing some steps in a certain embodiment can also be implemented as an independent embodiment, and the order of the steps in a certain embodiment can be arbitrarily exchanged. In addition, the optional implementation methods in a certain embodiment can be arbitrarily combined; in addition, the embodiments can be arbitrarily combined, for example, some or all of the steps of different embodiments can be arbitrarily combined, and a certain embodiment can be arbitrarily combined with the optional implementation methods of other embodiments.

在各本公开实施例中,如果没有特殊说明以及逻辑冲突,各实施例之间的术语和/或描述具有一致性,且可以互相引用,不同实施例中的技术特征根据其内在的逻辑关系可以组合形成新的实施例。In each embodiment of the present disclosure, unless otherwise specified or there is a logical conflict, the terms and/or descriptions between the embodiments are consistent and can be referenced to each other, and the technical features in different embodiments can be combined to form a new embodiment based on their internal logical relationships.

本公开实施例中所使用的术语只是为了描述特定实施例的目的,而并非作为对本公开的限制。The terms used in the embodiments of the present disclosure are only for the purpose of describing specific embodiments and are not intended to limit the present disclosure.

在本公开实施例中,除非另有说明,以单数形式表示的元素,如“一个”、“一种”、“该”、“上述”、“所述”、“前述”、“这一”等,可以表示“一个且只有一个”,也可以表示“一个或多个”、“至少一个”等。In the embodiments of the present disclosure, unless otherwise specified, elements expressed in the singular form, such as "one", "an", "the", "above", "said", "foregoing", "this", etc., may mean "one and only one", or may mean "one or more", "at least one", etc.

在本公开实施例中,“多个”是指两个或两个以上。In the embodiments of the present disclosure, “plurality” refers to two or more.

在一些实施例中,“至少一者(至少一项、至少一个)(at least one of)”、“一个或多个(one or more)”、“多个(a plurality of)”、“多个(multiple)等术语可以相互替换。In some embodiments, the terms "at least one of", "one or more", "a plurality of", "multiple", etc. can be used interchangeably.

在一些实施例中,“A、B中的至少一者”、“A和/或B”、“在一情况下A,在另一情况下B”、“响应于一情况A,响应于另一情况B”等记载方式,根据情况可以包括以下技术方案:在一些实施例中A(与B无关地执行A);在一些实施例中B(与A无关地执行B);在一些实施例中从A和B中选择执行(A和B被选择性执行);在一些实施例中A和B(A和B都被执行)。当有A、B、C等更多分支时也类似上述。In some embodiments, "at least one of A and B", "A and/or B", "A in one case, B in another case", "in response to one case A, in response to another case B", etc., may include the following technical solutions according to the situation: in some embodiments, A (A is executed independently of B); in some embodiments, B (B is executed independently of A); in some embodiments, execution is selected from A and B (A and B are selectively executed); in some embodiments, A and B (both A and B are executed). When there are more branches such as A, B, C, etc., the above is also similar.

在一些实施例中,“A或B”等记载方式,根据情况可以包括以下技术方案:在一些实施例中A(与B无关地执行A);在一些实施例中B(与A无关地执行B);在一些实施例中从A和B中选择执行(A和B被选择性执行)。当有A、B、C等更多分支时也类似上述。In some embodiments, the recording method of "A or B" may include the following technical solutions according to the situation: in some embodiments, A (A is executed independently of B); in some embodiments, B (B is executed independently of A); in some embodiments, execution is selected from A and B (A and B are selectively executed). When there are more branches such as A, B, C, etc., the above is also similar.

本公开实施例中的“第一”、“第二”等前缀词,仅仅为了区分不同的描述对象,不对描述对象的位置、顺序、优先级、数量或内容等构成限制,对描述对象的陈述参见权利要求或实施例中上下文的描述,不应因为使用前缀词而构成多余的限制。例如,描述对象为“字段”,则“第一字段”和“第二字段”中“字段”之前的序数词并不限制“字段”之间的 位置或顺序,“第一”和“第二”并不限制其修饰的“字段”是否在同一个消息中,也不限制“第一字段”和“第二字段”的先后顺序。再如,描述对象为“等级”,则“第一等级”和“第二等级”中“等级”之前的序数词并不限制“等级”之间的优先级。再如,描述对象的数量并不受序数词的限制,可以是一个或者多个,以“第一装置”为例,其中“装置”的数量可以是一个或者多个。此外,不同前缀词修饰的对象可以相同或不同,例如,描述对象为“装置”,则“第一装置”和“第二装置”可以是相同的装置或者不同的装置,其类型可以相同或不同;再如,描述对象为“信息”,则“第一信息”和“第二信息”可以是相同的信息或者不同的信息,其内容可以相同或不同。The prefixes such as "first" and "second" in the embodiments of the present disclosure are only used to distinguish different description objects, and do not limit the position, order, priority, quantity or content of the description objects. For the description of the description objects, please refer to the description in the context of the claims or embodiments, and the use of prefixes should not constitute unnecessary restrictions. For example, if the description object is "field", the ordinal number before "field" in "first field" and "second field" does not limit the order between "fields". In terms of position or order, "first" and "second" do not limit whether the "fields" they modify are in the same message, nor do they limit the order of the "first field" and the "second field". For another example, if the description object is "level", the ordinal number before the "level" in "first level" and "second level" does not limit the priority between the "levels". For another example, the number of description objects is not limited by ordinal numbers and can be one or more. For example, "first device" is used as an example, in which the number of "devices" can be one or more. In addition, the objects modified by different prefixes can be the same or different. For example, if the description object is "device", the "first device" and the "second device" can be the same device or different devices, and their types can be the same or different. For another example, if the description object is "information", the "first information" and the "second information" can be the same information or different information, and their contents can be the same or different.

在一些实施例中,“包括A”、“包含A”、“用于指示A”、“携带A”,可以解释为直接携带A,也可以解释为间接指示A。In some embodiments, “including A”, “comprising A”, “used to indicate A”, and “carrying A” can be interpreted as directly carrying A or indirectly indicating A.

在一些实施例中,“响应于……”、“响应于确定……”、“在……的情况下”、“在……时”、“当……时”、“若……”、“如果……”等术语可以相互替换。In some embodiments, terms such as "in response to ...", "in response to determining ...", "in the case of ...", "at the time of ...", "when ...", "if ...", "if ...", etc. can be used interchangeably.

在一些实施例中,装置等可以解释为实体的、也可以解释为虚拟的,其名称不限定于实施例中所In some embodiments, devices and the like can be interpreted as physical or virtual, and their names are not limited to those in the embodiments.

记载的名称,“装置”、“设备(equipment)”、“设备(device)”、“电路”、“网元”、“节点”、“功能”、“单元”、“部件(section)”、“系统”、“网络”、“芯片”、“芯片系统”、“实体”、“主体”等术语可以相互替换。The recorded names, terms such as "device", "equipment", "device", "circuit", "network element", "node", "function", "unit", "section", "system", "network", "chip", "chip system", "entity", and "subject" can be used interchangeably.

在一些实施例中,“网络”可以解释为网络中包含的装置(例如,接入网设备、核心网设备等)。In some embodiments, "network" may be interpreted as devices included in the network (eg, access network equipment, core network equipment, etc.).

在一些实施例中,“接入网设备(access network device,AN device)”、“无线接入网设备(radio access network device,RAN device)”、“基站(base station,BS)”、“无线基站(radio base station)”、“固定台(fixed station)”、“节点(node)”、“接入点(access point)”、“发送点(transmission point,TP)”、“接收点(reception point,RP)”、“发送接收点(transmission/reception point,TRP)”、“面板(panel)”、“天线面板(antenna panel)”、“天线阵列(antenna array)”、“小区(cell)”、“宏小区(macro cell)”、“小型小区(small cell)”、“毫微微小区(femto cell)”、“微微小区(pico cell)”、“扇区(sector)”、“小区组(cell group)”、“服务小区”、“载波(carrier)”、“分量载波(component carrier)”、“带宽部分(bandwidth part,BWP)”等术语可以相互替换。In some embodiments, the terms "access network device (AN device), "radio access network device (RAN device)", "base station (BS)", "radio base station (radio base station)", "fixed station (fixed station)", "node", "access point (access point)", "transmission point (TP)", "reception point (RP)", "transmission/reception point (TRP)", "panel", "antenna panel (antenna panel)", "antenna array (antenna array)", "cell", "macro cell", "small cell (small cell)", "femto cell (femto cell)", "pico cell (pico cell)", "sector (sector)", "cell group (cell)", "serving cell", "carrier (carrier)", "component carrier (component carrier)", "bandwidth part (bandwidth part (BWP))" and so on can be used interchangeably.

在一些实施例中,“终端(terminal)”、“终端设备(terminal device)”、“用户设备(user equipment,UE)”、“用户终端(user terminal)”、“移动台(mobile station,MS)”、“移动终端(mobile terminal,MT)”、订户站(subscriber station)、移动单元(mobile unit)、订户单元(subscriber unit)、无线单元(wireless unit)、远程单元(remote unit)、移动设备(mobile device)、无线设备(wireless device)、无线通信设备(wireless communication device)、远程设备(remote device)、移动订户站(mobile subscriber station)、接入终端(access terminal)、移动终端(mobile terminal)、无线终端(wireless terminal)、远程终端(remote terminal)、手持设备(handset)、用户代理(user agent)、移动客户端(mobile client)、客户端(client)等术语可以相互替换。In some embodiments, the terms "terminal", "terminal device", "user equipment (UE)", "user terminal" "mobile station (MS)", "mobile terminal (MT)", subscriber station, mobile unit, subscriber unit, wireless unit, remote unit, mobile device, wireless device, wireless communication device, remote device, mobile subscriber station, access terminal, mobile terminal, wireless terminal, remote terminal, handset, user agent, mobile client, client and the like can be used interchangeably.

在一些实施例中,接入网设备、核心网设备、或网络设备可以被替换为终端。例如,针对将接入网设备、核心网设备、或网络设备以及终端间的通信置换为多个终端间的通信(例如,设备对设备(device-to-device,D2D)、车联网(vehicle-to-everything,V2X)等)的结构,也可以应用本公开的各实施例。在该情况下,也可以设为终端具有接入网设备所具有的全部或部分功能的结构。此外,“上行”、“下行”等术语也可以被替 换为与终端间通信对应的术语(例如,“侧行(side)”)。例如,上行信道、下行信道等可以被替换为侧行信道,上行链路、下行链路等可以被替换为侧行链路。In some embodiments, the access network device, the core network device, or the network device may be replaced by a terminal. For example, the embodiments of the present disclosure may also be applied to a structure in which the communication between the access network device, the core network device, or the network device and the terminal is replaced by communication between multiple terminals (for example, device-to-device (D2D), vehicle-to-everything (V2X), etc.). In this case, it may also be configured that the terminal has all or part of the functions of the access network device. In addition, the terms "uplink" and "downlink" may also be replaced. The term "side" may be replaced with a term corresponding to inter-terminal communication (eg, "uplink channel", downlink channel, etc.). For example, uplink channel, downlink channel, etc. may be replaced with sidelink channel, and uplink, downlink, etc. may be replaced with sidelink.

在一些实施例中,终端可以被替换为接入网设备、核心网设备、或网络设备。在该情况下,也可以设为接入网设备、核心网设备、或网络设备具有终端所具有的全部或部分功能的结构。In some embodiments, the terminal may be replaced by an access network device, a core network device, or a network device. In this case, the access network device, the core network device, or the network device may also be configured to have a structure that has all or part of the functions of the terminal.

在一些实施例中,获取数据、信息等可以遵照所在地国家的法律法规。In some embodiments, acquisition of data, information, etc. may comply with the laws and regulations of the country where the data is obtained.

在一些实施例中,可以在得到用户同意后获取数据、信息等。In some embodiments, data, information, etc. may be obtained with the user's consent.

此外,本公开实施例的表格中的每一元素、每一行、或每一列均可以作为独立实施例来实施,任意元素、任意行、任意列的组合也可以作为独立实施例来实施。In addition, each element, each row, or each column in the table of the embodiments of the present disclosure may be implemented as an independent embodiment, and the combination of any elements, any rows, or any columns may also be implemented as an independent embodiment.

图1是根据本公开实施例示出的通信系统的架构示意图。FIG1 is a schematic diagram of the architecture of a communication system according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

如图1所示,通信系统100包括终端(terminal)101、网络设备102,其中,网络设备包括以下至少之一:接入网设备、核心网设备(core network device)。As shown in Figure 1, the communication system 100 includes a terminal 101 and a network device 102, wherein the network device includes at least one of the following: an access network device and a core network device.

在一些实施例中,终端101例如包括手机(mobile phone)、可穿戴设备、物联网设备、具备通信功能的汽车、智能汽车、平板电脑(Pad)、带无线收发功能的电脑、虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)终端设备、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)终端设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端设备、无人驾驶(self-driving)中的无线终端设备、远程手术(remote medical surgery)中的无线终端设备、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端设备、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端设备、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端设备、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端设备中的至少一者,但不限于此。In some embodiments, the terminal 101 includes, for example, a mobile phone, a wearable device, an Internet of Things device, a car with communication function, a smart car, a tablet computer (Pad), a computer with wireless transceiver function, a virtual reality (VR) terminal device, an augmented reality (AR) terminal device, a wireless terminal device in industrial control, a wireless terminal device in self-driving, a wireless terminal device in remote medical surgery, a wireless terminal device in a smart grid, a wireless terminal device in transportation safety, a wireless terminal device in a smart city, and at least one of a wireless terminal device in a smart home, but is not limited to these.

在一些实施例中,接入网设备例如是将终端接入到无线网络的节点或设备,接入网设备可以包括5G通信系统中的演进节点B(evolved NodeB,eNB)、下一代演进节点B(next generation eNB,ng-eNB)、下一代节点B(next generation NodeB,gNB)、节点B(node B,NB)、家庭节点B(home node B,HNB)、家庭演进节点B(home evolved nodeB,HeNB)、无线回传设备、无线网络控制器(radio network controller,RNC)、基站控制器(base station controller,BSC)、基站收发台(base transceiver station,BTS)、基带单元(base band unit,BBU)、移动交换中心、6G通信系统中的基站、开放型基站(Open RAN)、云基站(Cloud RAN)、其他通信系统中的基站、Wi-Fi系统中的接入节点中的至少一者,但不限于此。In some embodiments, the access network device is, for example, a node or device that accesses a terminal to a wireless network. The access network device may include an evolved Node B (eNB), a next generation evolved Node B (ng-eNB), a next generation Node B (gNB), a node B (NB), a home node B (HNB), a home evolved node B (HeNB), a wireless backhaul device, a radio network controller (RNC), a base station controller (BSC), a base transceiver station (BTS), a base band unit (BBU), a mobile switching center, a base station in a 6G communication system, an open base station (Open RAN), a cloud base station (Cloud RAN), a base station in other communication systems, and at least one of an access node in a Wi-Fi system, but is not limited thereto.

在一些实施例中,核心网设备可以是一个设备,包括一个或多个网元,也可以是多个设备或设备群,分别包括上述一个或多个网元中的全部或部分。网元可以是虚拟的,也可以是实体的。核心网例如包括演进分组核心(Evolved Packet Core,EPC)、5G核心网络(5G Core Network,5GCN)、下一代核心(Next Generation Core,NGC)中的至少一者。In some embodiments, the core network device may be a device including one or more network elements, or may be multiple devices or device groups, each including all or part of the one or more network elements. The network element may be virtual or physical. The core network may include, for example, at least one of the Evolved Packet Core (EPC), the 5G Core Network (5GCN), and the Next Generation Core (NGC).

在一些实施例中,本公开的技术方案可适用于Open RAN架构,此时,本公开实施例所涉及的接入网设备间或者接入网设备内的接口可变为Open RAN的内部接口,这些内部接口之间的流程和信息交互可以通过软件或者程序实现。In some embodiments, the technical solution of the present disclosure may be applicable to the Open RAN architecture. In this case, the interfaces between access network devices or within access network devices involved in the embodiments of the present disclosure may become internal interfaces of Open RAN, and the processes and information interactions between these internal interfaces may be implemented through software or programs.

在一些实施例中,接入网设备可以由集中单元(central unit,CU)与分布式单元(distributed unit,DU)组成的,其中,CU也可以称为控制单元(control unit),采用CU-DU的结构可以将接入网设备的协议层拆分开,部分协议层的功能放在CU集中控制,剩下部分或全部协议层的功能分布在DU中,由CU集中控制DU,但不限于此。 In some embodiments, the access network device may be composed of a centralized unit (central unit, CU) and a distributed unit (distributed unit, DU), wherein the CU may also be referred to as a control unit (control unit). The CU-DU structure may be used to split the protocol layer of the access network device, with some functions of the protocol layer being centrally controlled by the CU, and the remaining part or all of the functions of the protocol layer being distributed in the DU, and the DU being centrally controlled by the CU, but not limited to this.

可以理解的是,本公开实施例描述的通信系统是为了更加清楚的说明本公开实施例的技术方案,并不构成对于本公开实施例提出的技术方案的限定,本领域普通技术人员可知,随着系统架构的演变和新业务场景的出现,本公开实施例提出的技术方案对于类似的技术问题同样适用。It can be understood that the communication system described in the embodiment of the present disclosure is for the purpose of more clearly illustrating the technical solution of the embodiment of the present disclosure, and does not constitute a limitation on the technical solution proposed in the embodiment of the present disclosure. A person of ordinary skill in the art can know that with the evolution of the system architecture and the emergence of new business scenarios, the technical solution proposed in the embodiment of the present disclosure is also applicable to similar technical problems.

下述本公开实施例可以应用于图1所示的通信系统100、或部分主体,但不限于此。图1所示的各主体是例示,通信系统可以包括图1中的全部或部分主体,也可以包括图1以外的其他主体,各主体数量和形态为任意,各主体可以是实体的也可以是虚拟的,各主体之间的连接关系是例示,各主体之间可以不连接也可以连接,其连接可以是任意方式,可以是直接连接也可以是间接连接,可以是有线连接也可以是无线连接。The following embodiments of the present disclosure may be applied to the communication system 100 shown in FIG1 , or part of the subject, but are not limited thereto. The subjects shown in FIG1 are examples, and the communication system may include all or part of the subjects in FIG1 , or may include other subjects other than FIG1 , and the number and form of the subjects are arbitrary, and the subjects may be physical or virtual, and the connection relationship between the subjects is an example, and the subjects may be connected or disconnected, and the connection may be in any manner, and may be a direct connection or an indirect connection, and may be a wired connection or a wireless connection.

本公开各实施例可以应用于长期演进(Long Term Evolution,LTE)、LTE-Advanced(LTE-A)、LTE-Beyond(LTE-B)、SUPER 3G、IMT-Advanced、第四代移动通信系统(4th generation mobile communication system,4G)、)、第五代移动通信系统(5th generation mobile communication system,5G)、5G新空口(new radio,NR)、未来无线接入(Future Radio Access,FRA)、新无线接入技术(New-Radio Access Technology,RAT)、新无线(New Radio,NR)、新无线接入(New radio access,NX)、未来一代无线接入(Future generation radio access,FX)、Global System for Mobile communications(GSM(注册商标))、CDMA2000、超移动宽带(Ultra Mobile Broadband,UMB)、IEEE 802.11(Wi-Fi(注册商标))、IEEE 802.16(WiMAX(注册商标))、IEEE 802.20、超宽带(Ultra-WideBand,UWB)、蓝牙(Bluetooth(注册商标))、陆上公用移动通信网(Public Land Mobile Network,PLMN)网络、设备到设备(Device-to-Device,D2D)系统、机器到机器(Machine to Machine,M2M)系统、物联网(Internet of Things,IoT)系统、车联网(Vehicle-to-Everything,V2X)、利用其他通信方法的系统、基于它们而扩展的下一代系统等。此外,也可以将多个系统组合(例如,LTE或者LTE-A与5G的组合等)应用。The embodiments of the present disclosure may be applied to Long Term Evolution (LTE), LTE-Advanced (LTE-A), LTE-Beyond (LTE-B), SUPER 3G, IMT-Advanced, the fourth generation mobile communication system (4G), the fifth generation mobile communication system (5G), 5G new radio (NR), Future Radio Access (FRA), New-Radio Access Technology (RAT), New Radio (NR), New radio access (NX), Future generation radio access ... The present invention relates to wireless communication systems such as LTE, Wi-Fi (X), Global System for Mobile communications (GSM (registered trademark)), CDMA2000, Ultra Mobile Broadband (UMB), IEEE 802.11 (Wi-Fi (registered trademark)), IEEE 802.16 (WiMAX (registered trademark)), IEEE 802.20, Ultra-WideBand (UWB), Bluetooth (registered trademark), Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN) network, Device to Device (D2D) system, Machine to Machine (M2M) system, Internet of Things (IoT) system, Vehicle to Everything (V2X), systems using other communication methods, and next-generation systems expanded based on them. In addition, a combination of multiple systems (for example, a combination of LTE or LTE-A with 5G, etc.) may also be applied.

在一些实施例中,网络设备可以为终端配置子带。In some embodiments, the network device may configure a sub-band for the terminal.

在一些实施例中,子带包括以下至少之一:上行子带、下行子带。In some embodiments, the subband includes at least one of the following: an uplink subband and a downlink subband.

在一些实施例中,网络设备可以在第一类型的时隙中为终端配置上行子带,其中,第一类型的时隙包括以下至少之一:下行时隙、灵活(flexible)时隙。In some embodiments, the network device may configure an uplink subband for the terminal in a first type of time slot, wherein the first type of time slot includes at least one of the following: a downlink time slot and a flexible time slot.

下行时隙对应的频域资源为下行频域资源,而在下行时隙中为终端配置上行子带,下行时隙的频域资源中对应上行子带的频域资源就可以用于上行通信了,从而网络设备可以在下行时隙对应的上行子带中进行上行通信,以及在上行子带以外的频域资源中进行下行通信,从而实现全双工通信。The frequency domain resources corresponding to the downlink time slot are the downlink frequency domain resources, and an uplink sub-band is configured for the terminal in the downlink time slot. The frequency domain resources corresponding to the uplink sub-band in the frequency domain resources of the downlink time slot can be used for uplink communication, so that the network equipment can perform uplink communication in the uplink sub-band corresponding to the downlink time slot, and perform downlink communication in the frequency domain resources outside the uplink sub-band, thereby realizing full-duplex communication.

灵活时隙对应的频域资源可以被配置或调度为下行频域资源,而在灵活时隙中为终端配置上行子带,灵活时隙的频域资源中对应上行子带的频域资源就可以用于上行通信了,从而网络设备可以在灵活时隙对应的上行子带中进行上行通信,以及在上行子带以外的频域资源中进行下行通信,从而实现全双工通信。例如,对于配置有子带的时域单元,可以称作子带全双工(Subband Based Full Duplex,SBFD)时域单元。The frequency domain resources corresponding to the flexible time slot can be configured or scheduled as downlink frequency domain resources, and the uplink subband is configured for the terminal in the flexible time slot, and the frequency domain resources corresponding to the uplink subband in the frequency domain resources of the flexible time slot can be used for uplink communication, so that the network equipment can perform uplink communication in the uplink subband corresponding to the flexible time slot, and perform downlink communication in the frequency domain resources outside the uplink subband, thereby realizing full-duplex communication. For example, a time domain unit configured with a subband can be called a subband based full duplex (SBFD) time domain unit.

在一些实施例中,网络设备可以在第二类型的时隙中为终端配置下行子带,其中,第二类型的时隙包括以下至少之一:上行时隙、灵活时隙。In some embodiments, the network device may configure a downlink subband for the terminal in a second type of time slot, wherein the second type of time slot includes at least one of the following: an uplink time slot and a flexible time slot.

上行时隙对应的频域资源为上行频域资源,而在上行时隙中为终端配置下行子带,上行时隙的频域资源中对应下行子带的频域资源就可以用于下行通信了,从而网络设备可以在上行时隙对应的下行子带中进行下行通信,以及在下行子带以外的频域资源 中进行上行通信,从而实现全双工通信。The frequency domain resources corresponding to the uplink time slot are the uplink frequency domain resources, and the downlink subband is configured for the terminal in the uplink time slot. The frequency domain resources corresponding to the downlink subband in the frequency domain resources of the uplink time slot can be used for downlink communication, so that the network equipment can perform downlink communication in the downlink subband corresponding to the uplink time slot, as well as in the frequency domain resources outside the downlink subband. Uplink communication is carried out in the , thus achieving full-duplex communication.

灵活时隙对应的频域资源可以被配置或调度为上行频域资源,而在灵活时隙中为终端配置下行子带,灵活时隙的频域资源中对应下行子带的频域资源就可以用于下行通信了,从而网络设备可以在灵活时隙对应的下行子带中进行下行通信,以及在下行子带以外的频域资源中进行上行通信,从而实现全双工通信。The frequency domain resources corresponding to the flexible time slot can be configured or scheduled as uplink frequency domain resources, and a downlink sub-band is configured for the terminal in the flexible time slot. The frequency domain resources corresponding to the downlink sub-band in the frequency domain resources of the flexible time slot can be used for downlink communication. Therefore, the network equipment can perform downlink communication in the downlink sub-band corresponding to the flexible time slot, and perform uplink communication in the frequency domain resources outside the downlink sub-band, thereby realizing full-duplex communication.

在一些实施例中,终端与网络设备在时域单元中可以进行的通信包括以下至少之一:数据通信、非数据通信(例如信令通信)。In some embodiments, the communication that can be performed between the terminal and the network device in the time domain unit includes at least one of the following: data communication, non-data communication (eg, signaling communication).

终端在时域单元中进行数据通信(例如终端向网络设备发送传输块(Transport Block,TB)或接收网络设备发送的传输块)的情况下,在某些场景中,可以在多个时域单元中进行数据通信,例如可以在多个时域单元中重复接收(repetition)物理下行共享频道(Physical Downlink Shared Channel,PDSCH)。对于在多个时域单元中的数据通信,可以配置一个调制编码策略(Modulation and Coding Scheme,MCS)。When a terminal performs data communication in a time domain unit (for example, the terminal sends a transport block (TB) to a network device or receives a transport block sent by a network device), in some scenarios, data communication can be performed in multiple time domain units, for example, the Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH) can be repeatedly received (repetition) in multiple time domain units. For data communication in multiple time domain units, a modulation and coding scheme (MCS) can be configured.

但是,在多个时域单元包括SBFD时域单元和非SBFD时域单元(也即未配置子带的时域单元)时,由于在SBFD时域单元上既存在上行通信,又存在下行通信,而在非SBFD时域单元中则只存在上行通信或下行通信,所以在SBFD时域单元上的干扰相对于非SBFD时域单元上的干扰会相对较大。其中,干扰可以包括对于网络设备而言的干扰,和/或对于终端而言的干扰。However, when the multiple time domain units include SBFD time domain units and non-SBFD time domain units (i.e., time domain units without subband configuration), since there are both uplink and downlink communications in the SBFD time domain units, and there are only uplink or downlink communications in the non-SBFD time domain units, the interference in the SBFD time domain units is relatively large relative to the interference in the non-SBFD time domain units. The interference may include interference for the network device and/or interference for the terminal.

如果在多个时域单元上采用相同的调制编码策略进行通信,调制编码策略难以同时良好地适用于SBFD时域单元和非SBFD时域单元,容易影响在SBFD时域单元的通信质量。If the same modulation and coding strategy is used for communication in multiple time domain units, it is difficult for the modulation and coding strategy to be well applied to the SBFD time domain unit and the non-SBFD time domain unit at the same time, which easily affects the communication quality in the SBFD time domain unit.

图2是根据本公开的实施例示出的一种调制编码策略确定方法的交互示意图。FIG2 is an interactive schematic diagram of a modulation and coding strategy determination method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

如图2所示,调制编码策略确定方法可以包括以下步骤:As shown in FIG. 2 , the modulation and coding strategy determination method may include the following steps:

步骤S201,网络设备向终端发送第一信息。Step S201: The network device sends first information to the terminal.

在一些实施例中,终端接收第一信息。In some embodiments, the terminal receives first information.

在一些实施例中,第一信息用于确定在多个时域单元中的至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。In some embodiments, the first information is used to determine a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among the plurality of time domain units.

在一些实施例中,所述多个时域单元包括配置有子带的第一类时域单元和未配置子带的第二类时域单元。In some embodiments, the plurality of time domain units include first-type time domain units configured with subbands and second-type time domain units not configured with subbands.

在一些实施例中,时域单元包括以下至少之一:帧、子帧、时隙、符号,其中,符号例如可以为正交频分复用符号。In some embodiments, the time domain unit includes at least one of the following: a frame, a subframe, a time slot, and a symbol, wherein the symbol may be, for example, an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing symbol.

在一些实施例中,网络设备可以向终端发送第一指示信息,第一指示信息可以包括一个第一索引。In some embodiments, the network device may send first indication information to the terminal, and the first indication information may include a first index.

由于一个索引与一个调制编码策略对应,那么为了确定第一调制编码策略和第二调制编码策略,终端可以根据第一索引和第一偏移量确定第二索引,从而第一索引和第二索引可以分别对应调制编码策略,例如第一索引对应第一调制编码策略,第二索引对应第二调制编码策略。Since one index corresponds to a modulation and coding strategy, in order to determine the first modulation and coding strategy and the second modulation and coding strategy, the terminal can determine the second index based on the first index and the first offset, so that the first index and the second index can correspond to the modulation and coding strategies respectively, for example, the first index corresponds to the first modulation and coding strategy, and the second index corresponds to the second modulation and coding strategy.

步骤S202,终端根据第一信息确定在多个时域单元中的至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。Step S202: The terminal determines a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among a plurality of time domain units according to the first information.

在一些实施例中,第一信息可以是从网络设备接收的,或者,第一信息可以是根 据协议约定确定的。In some embodiments, the first information may be received from a network device, or the first information may be received from a network device. Determined according to the agreement.

在一些实施例中,在终端根据协议约定确定第一信息的情况下,终端可以根据步骤S202执行操作,步骤S201则是可选的。In some embodiments, when the terminal determines the first information according to a protocol agreement, the terminal may perform an operation according to step S202, and step S201 is optional.

在一些实施例中,在从网络设备接收第一信息的情况下,网络设备可以通过无线资源控制信令携带第一信息发送至终端。In some embodiments, when receiving the first information from the network device, the network device may send the first information to the terminal via radio resource control signaling.

在一些实施例中,所述数据通信包括以下至少之一:In some embodiments, the data communication includes at least one of the following:

在所述多个时域单元上重复接收的物理下行共享信道;Repeating the received physical downlink shared channel on the multiple time domain units;

在所述多个时域单元上重复发送的物理上行共享信道;A physical uplink shared channel repeatedly transmitted on the plurality of time domain units;

在所述多个时域单元上基于配置授权方式发送的物理上行共享信道;A physical uplink shared channel sent in a configuration authorization manner on the multiple time domain units;

在所述多个时域单元上基于触发方式接收的物理下行共享信道。A physical downlink shared channel is received on the multiple time domain units based on a triggering manner.

在一些实施例中,终端中可以存储有索引与调制编码策略的关联关系,其中,关联关系例如可以为调制编码策略与索引之前的关系表。In some embodiments, the terminal may store an association relationship between the index and the modulation and coding strategy, wherein the association relationship may be, for example, a relationship table between the modulation and coding strategy and the index.

在一些实施例中,所述第一信息用于指示所述终端根据一个第一偏移量以及网络设备指示的一个调制编码策略对应的一个第一索引,确定在所述第一类时域单元上数据通信的第一调制编码策略以及在所述第二类时域单元数据通信的第二调制编码策略。In some embodiments, the first information is used to instruct the terminal to determine a first modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and a second modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit based on a first offset and a first index corresponding to a modulation and coding strategy indicated by a network device.

在一些实施例中,所述根据第一信息确定在多个时域单元中的至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,包括:确定在所述第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为所述第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略,在所述第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为第二索引对应的第二调制编码策略,其中,所述第二索引根据所述第一索引和所述第一偏移量确定。In some embodiments, determining the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among multiple time domain units based on the first information includes: determining the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit as the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index, and determining the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit as the second modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the second index, wherein the second index is determined based on the first index and the first offset.

在一些实施例中,所述根据第一信息确定在多个时域单元中的至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,包括:确定在所述第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为所述第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略,在所述第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为第二索引对应的第二调制编码策略,其中,所述第二索引根据所述第一索引和所述第一偏移量确定。In some embodiments, determining the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among multiple time domain units based on the first information includes: determining the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit as the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index, and determining the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit as the second modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the second index, wherein the second index is determined based on the first index and the first offset.

在一些实施例中,所述调制编码策略确定方法还包括:根据网络设备的指示确定在所述第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为所述第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略。In some embodiments, the modulation and coding strategy determination method further includes: determining, according to an instruction of a network device, that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit is a first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index.

在一些实施例中,所述调制编码策略确定方法还包括:根据网络设备的指示确定在所述第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为所述第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略。In some embodiments, the modulation and coding strategy determination method further includes: determining, according to an instruction of a network device, that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index.

在一些实施例中,所述调制编码策略确定方法还包括:根据协议约定确定在所述第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为所述第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略。In some embodiments, the modulation and coding strategy determination method further includes: determining, according to a protocol agreement, that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit is a first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index.

在一些实施例中,所述调制编码策略确定方法还包括:根据协议约定确定在所述第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为所述第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略。In some embodiments, the modulation and coding strategy determination method further includes: determining, according to a protocol agreement, that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index.

在一些实施例中,所述第一偏移量为基于协议约定确定的。In some embodiments, the first offset is determined based on a protocol agreement.

在一些实施例中,所述第一偏移量为网络设备指示的。In some embodiments, the first offset is indicated by a network device.

在一些实施例中,所述第一信息用于指示所述终端根据多个调制编码策略对应的 多个第一索引,确定在所述多个时域单元中的至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。In some embodiments, the first information is used to indicate that the terminal corresponds to a plurality of modulation and coding strategies. A plurality of first indexes are used to determine a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among the plurality of time domain units.

在一些实施例中,所述多个第一索引为两个第一索引。In some embodiments, the plurality of first indexes are two first indexes.

在一些实施例中,一个第一索引对应的调制编码策略为在所述第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,另一个第一索引对应的调制编码策略为在所述第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。In some embodiments, the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to a first index is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit, and the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to another first index is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit.

在一些实施例中,网络设备可以向终端指示两个第一索引与第一类时域单元和第二类时域单元的关联关系,或者,终端可以基于协议约定确定两个第一索引与第一类时域单元和第二类时域单元的关联关系。In some embodiments, the network device can indicate to the terminal the association relationship between the two first indexes and the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit, or the terminal can determine the association relationship between the two first indexes and the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit based on protocol agreement.

在一些实施例中,所述第一信息用于指示所述终端根据网络设备指示的一个调制编码策略对应的一个第一索引和多个调制编码策略表确定在所述多个时域单元中的至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。In some embodiments, the first information is used to instruct the terminal to determine the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among the multiple time domain units according to a first index corresponding to a modulation and coding strategy indicated by a network device and multiple modulation and coding strategy tables.

在一些实施例中,调制编码策略表可以根据协议约定确定,或者,可以由网络设备指示,例如网络设备可以通过无线资源控制信令向终端指示多个调制编码策略表。In some embodiments, the modulation and coding strategy table may be determined according to a protocol agreement, or may be indicated by a network device. For example, the network device may indicate multiple modulation and coding strategy tables to the terminal through radio resource control signaling.

在一些实施例中,所述多个调制编码策略表为两个调制编码策略表,其中,所述第一索引在一个调制编码策略表中对应的调制编码策略为在所述第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,所述第一索引在另一个调制编码策略表中对应的调制编码策略为在所述第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。In some embodiments, the multiple modulation and coding strategy tables are two modulation and coding strategy tables, wherein the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index in one modulation and coding strategy table is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit, and the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index in another modulation and coding strategy table is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit.

在一些实施例中,网络设备可以向终端指示两个调制编码策略表与第一类时域单元和第二类时域单元的关联关系,或者,终端可以基于协议约定确定两个调制编码策略表与第一类时域单元和第二类时域单元的关联关系。In some embodiments, the network device can indicate to the terminal the association relationship between the two modulation and coding strategy tables and the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit, or the terminal can determine the association relationship between the two modulation and coding strategy tables and the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit based on protocol agreement.

在一些实施例中,所述子带包括以下至少之一:上行子带;下行子带。In some embodiments, the sub-band includes at least one of the following: an uplink sub-band; a downlink sub-band.

在一些实施例中,所述第一信息包括以下至少之一:协议约定的规则;网络设备的信令。In some embodiments, the first information includes at least one of the following: rules agreed upon by a protocol; signaling of a network device.

本公开实施例所涉及的通信方法可以包括步骤S201~步骤S202中的至少一者。例如,步骤S201可以作为独立实施例来实施,步骤S201可以作为独立实施例来实施,步骤S201+S202可以作为独立实施例来实施,但不限于此。The communication method involved in the embodiment of the present disclosure may include at least one of step S201 to step S202. For example, step S201 may be implemented as an independent embodiment, step S201 may be implemented as an independent embodiment, and step S201+S202 may be implemented as an independent embodiment, but it is not limited thereto.

在一些实施例中,步骤S201、S202可以交换顺序或同时执行。In some embodiments, steps S201 and S202 may be performed in an interchangeable order or simultaneously.

在一些实施例中,可参见图2所对应的说明书之前或之后记载的其他可选实现方式。In some embodiments, reference may be made to other optional implementations recorded before or after the description corresponding to FIG. 2 .

第一方面,本公开的实施例提出了调制编码策略确定方法。图3是根据本公开的实施例示出的一种调制编码策略确定方法的示意流程图。本实施例所示的调制编码策略确定方法可以由终端执行。In a first aspect, an embodiment of the present disclosure proposes a method for determining a modulation and coding strategy. Fig. 3 is a schematic flow chart of a method for determining a modulation and coding strategy according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. The method for determining a modulation and coding strategy shown in this embodiment can be executed by a terminal.

如图3所示,所述调制编码策略确定方法可以包括以下步骤:As shown in FIG3 , the modulation and coding strategy determination method may include the following steps:

在步骤S301中,根据第一信息确定在多个时域单元中的至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,其中,所述多个时域单元包括配置有子带的第一类时域单元和未配置子带的第二类时域单元。In step S301, a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among a plurality of time domain units is determined according to first information, wherein the plurality of time domain units include a first type of time domain unit configured with a subband and a second type of time domain unit not configured with a subband.

在一些实施例中,所述第一信息包括以下至少之一:协议约定的规则;网络设备的信令,例如无线资源控制(Radio Resource Control,RRC)信令。 In some embodiments, the first information includes at least one of the following: rules agreed upon by a protocol; signaling of a network device, such as Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling.

在一些实施例中,终端可以在多个时域单元中与网络设备进行数据通信,在多个时域单元包括第一类时域单元(例如SBFD时域单元)和第二类时域单元(例如非SBFD时域单元)的情况下,终端可以根据第一信息确定至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,其中,第一类时域单元和第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略可以不同。In some embodiments, the terminal can communicate data with a network device in multiple time domain units. When the multiple time domain units include a first type of time domain unit (e.g., an SBFD time domain unit) and a second type of time domain unit (e.g., a non-SBFD time domain unit), the terminal can determine the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit based on the first information, wherein the modulation and coding strategies for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit may be different.

据此,便于终端采用不同的调制编码策略应用于第一类时域单元和第二类时域单元上的数据通信,有利于缓解干扰对第一类时域单元中数据通信的影响,进而保证在第一类时域单元中数据通信的通信质量。Accordingly, it is convenient for the terminal to adopt different modulation and coding strategies for data communication in the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit, which is conducive to alleviating the impact of interference on data communication in the first type of time domain unit, and thus ensuring the communication quality of data communication in the first type of time domain unit.

在一些实施例中,数据通信并不限于终端接收重复传输的物理下行共享信道,还可以包括其他类型的数据通信,例如,数据通信包括以下至少之一:In some embodiments, data communication is not limited to the terminal receiving the repeatedly transmitted physical downlink shared channel, and may also include other types of data communication. For example, data communication includes at least one of the following:

在所述多个时域单元上重复接收的物理下行共享信道;Repeating the received physical downlink shared channel on the multiple time domain units;

在所述多个时域单元上重复发送的物理上行共享信道(Physical Uplink Shared Channel,PUSCH);A physical uplink shared channel (Physical Uplink Shared Channel, PUSCH) repeatedly transmitted on the plurality of time domain units;

在所述多个时域单元上基于配置授权(configured grant,CG)方式发送的物理上行共享信道;A physical uplink shared channel sent on the plurality of time domain units based on a configured grant (CG);

在所述多个时域单元上基于触发方式接收的物理下行共享信道。A physical downlink shared channel is received on the multiple time domain units based on a triggering manner.

在一些实施例中,重复发送的物理上行共享信道(PUSCH repetition),包括以下至少之一:PUSCH repetition Type A,PUSCH repetition Type B。In some embodiments, the repeatedly transmitted physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH repetition) includes at least one of the following: PUSCH repetition Type A, PUSCH repetition Type B.

在一些实施例中,基于配置授权方式发送的物理上行共享信道,包括以下至少之一:type-1 CG PUSCH、type-2 CG PUSCH。In some embodiments, the physical uplink shared channel sent based on the configuration authorization method includes at least one of the following: type-1 CG PUSCH, type-2 CG PUSCH.

在一些实施例中,基于触发方式接收的物理下行共享信道包括但不限于半持续调度(Semi-Persistent Scheduling,SPS)物理下行共享信道,其中,半持续调度物理下行共享信道可以通过下行控制信息(Downlink Control Information,DCI)触发。In some embodiments, the physical downlink shared channel received based on the triggering manner includes but is not limited to a semi-persistent scheduling (Semi-Persistent Scheduling, SPS) physical downlink shared channel, wherein the semi-persistent scheduling physical downlink shared channel can be triggered by downlink control information (Downlink Control Information, DCI).

在一些实施例中,时域单元包括以下至少之一:帧、子帧、时隙(slot)、符号(symbol),其中,符号例如可以为OFDM(Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing,正交频分复用)符号。In some embodiments, the time domain unit includes at least one of the following: a frame, a subframe, a time slot, and a symbol, wherein the symbol may be, for example, an OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing) symbol.

图4是根据本公开的实施例示出的一种网络设备在SBFD时隙进行全双工通信的示意图。FIG4 is a schematic diagram showing a network device performing full-duplex communication in a SBFD time slot according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

如图4所示,以网络设备在下行时隙为终端配置上行子带为例,例如下行时隙对应的频域资源包括至少一个带宽部分(BandWidth Part,BWP)。As shown in FIG4 , taking the case where a network device configures an uplink subband for a terminal in a downlink time slot as an example, the frequency domain resources corresponding to the downlink time slot include at least one bandwidth part (BandWidth Part, BWP).

如图4中情况a,网络设备可以在下行时隙中的上行子带与终端进行上行通信,还可以在上行子带以外的频域资源与终端进行下行通信,用于上行通信的上行资源和用于下行通信的下行资源可以不重叠。需要说明的是,在同一个时隙中进行上行通信的终端和下行通信的终端可以为不同的终端。As shown in case a in Figure 4, the network device can perform uplink communication with the terminal in the uplink subband in the downlink time slot, and can also perform downlink communication with the terminal in the frequency domain resources outside the uplink subband, and the uplink resources used for uplink communication and the downlink resources used for downlink communication may not overlap. It should be noted that the terminal performing uplink communication and the terminal performing downlink communication in the same time slot may be different terminals.

如图4中情况b,网络设备可以在下行时隙中的上行子带与终端进行上行通信,还可以在上行子带与终端进行下行通信,用于上行通信的上行资源和用于下行通信的下行资源可以完全重叠。As shown in case b in FIG. 4 , the network device can perform uplink communication with the terminal in the uplink subband in the downlink time slot, and can also perform downlink communication with the terminal in the uplink subband. The uplink resources used for uplink communication and the downlink resources used for downlink communication can completely overlap.

如图4中情况c,网络设备可以在下行时隙中的上行子带与终端进行上行通信,还可以在上行子带以及上行子带以外的频域资源与终端进行下行通信,用于上行通信的上行资源和用于下行通信的下行资源可以部分重叠。 As shown in case c in Figure 4, the network device can perform uplink communication with the terminal in the uplink subband in the downlink time slot, and can also perform downlink communication with the terminal in the uplink subband and frequency domain resources outside the uplink subband. The uplink resources used for uplink communication and the downlink resources used for downlink communication can partially overlap.

图5是根据本公开的实施例示出的一种带宽部分中心频点的示意图。FIG5 is a schematic diagram showing a central frequency point of a bandwidth portion according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

在一个实施例中,SBFD时隙在频域上可以对应时分双工(Time Division Duplexing,TDD)频段,网络设备可以在TDD频段中为终端配置上行带宽部分和下行带宽部分。如图5所示,网络设备可以将上行带宽部分的中心频点和下行带宽部分的中心频点对齐,然后将对齐了中心频点之后的上行带宽部分和下行带宽部分配置给终端。In one embodiment, the SBFD time slot may correspond to a time division duplexing (TDD) frequency band in the frequency domain, and the network device may configure an uplink bandwidth part and a downlink bandwidth part for the terminal in the TDD frequency band. As shown in FIG5 , the network device may align the center frequency point of the uplink bandwidth part with the center frequency point of the downlink bandwidth part, and then configure the uplink bandwidth part and the downlink bandwidth part after the center frequency points are aligned to the terminal.

需要说明的是,下行带宽部分和上行带宽部分的频域范围可以相同,也可以不同,对此本公开并不限制。It should be noted that the frequency domain ranges of the downlink bandwidth part and the uplink bandwidth part may be the same or different, and the present disclosure does not limit this.

例如网络设备通过时分双工上下行配置(TDD UL-DL configuration)为终端配置的时隙结构为DDDDDDSUUU,其中,D表示下行时隙,U表示上行时隙,S表示灵活时隙,也即在10个时隙中,slot#0至slot#5为下行时隙,slot#6为灵活时隙,slot#7至slot#9为上行时隙。For example, the time slot structure configured by the network device for the terminal through time division duplex uplink and downlink configuration (TDD UL-DL configuration) is DDDDDDSUUU, where D represents the downlink time slot, U represents the uplink time slot, and S represents the flexible time slot. That is, in the 10 time slots, slot#0 to slot#5 are downlink time slots, slot#6 is the flexible time slot, and slot#7 to slot#9 are uplink time slots.

其中,下行时隙对应的频域资源可以包括下行带宽部分,上行时隙对应的频域资源可以包括上行带宽部分。The frequency domain resources corresponding to the downlink time slot may include a downlink bandwidth part, and the frequency domain resources corresponding to the uplink time slot may include an uplink bandwidth part.

在一个实施例中,将上行带宽部分的中心频点和下行带宽部分的中心频点对齐的操作,可以适用于基于非对称频谱(unpaired spectrum)通信的场景,也可以适用于基于对称频谱(paired spectrum)通信的场景。In one embodiment, the operation of aligning the center frequency of the uplink bandwidth part and the center frequency of the downlink bandwidth part can be applicable to scenarios based on asymmetric spectrum (unpaired spectrum) communication, and can also be applicable to scenarios based on symmetric spectrum (paired spectrum) communication.

在一些实施例中,所述第一信息用于指示所述终端根据一个第一偏移量以及网络设备指示的一个调制编码策略对应的一个第一索引,确定在所述第一类时域单元上数据通信的第一调制编码策略以及在所述第二类时域单元数据通信的第二调制编码策略。In some embodiments, the first information is used to instruct the terminal to determine a first modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and a second modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit based on a first offset and a first index corresponding to a modulation and coding strategy indicated by a network device.

在一些实施例中,终端中可以存储有索引(index)与调制编码策略的关联关系,其中,关联关系例如可以为调制编码策略与索引之前的关系表。In some embodiments, the terminal may store an association relationship between an index and a modulation and coding strategy, wherein the association relationship may be, for example, a relationship table between the modulation and coding strategy and the index.

网络设备可以向终端发送第一指示信息,第一指示信息可以包括一个第一索引。终端可以在上述关联关系中确定第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略,还可以根据第一信息的指示基于第一索引和第一偏移量确定第二编码策略。进而可以根据第一调制编码策略和第二调制编码策略中的一个调制编码策略在第一类时域单元上进行数据通信,以及根据第一调制编码策略和第二调制编码策略中的另一个调制编码策略在第二类时域单元上进行数据通信。The network device may send a first indication information to the terminal, and the first indication information may include a first index. The terminal may determine the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index in the above association relationship, and may also determine the second coding strategy based on the first index and the first offset according to the indication of the first information. Then, data communication may be performed on the first type of time domain unit according to one of the first modulation and coding strategies and the second modulation and coding strategies, and data communication may be performed on the second type of time domain unit according to the other modulation and coding strategy of the first modulation and coding strategy and the second modulation and coding strategy.

据此,可以确保针对第一类时域单元和第二类时域单元确定不同的调制编码策略,便于采用不同的调制编码策略应用于第一类时域单元和第二类时域单元上的数据通信,有利于缓解干扰对第一类时域单元中数据通信的影响,进而保证在第一类时域单元中数据通信的通信质量。Based on this, it can be ensured that different modulation and coding strategies are determined for the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit, which facilitates the use of different modulation and coding strategies for data communication in the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit, and is beneficial to alleviating the impact of interference on data communication in the first type of time domain unit, thereby ensuring the communication quality of data communication in the first type of time domain unit.

需要说明的是,在第一信息由网络设备发送至终端的情况下,第一指示信息包含在第一信息中,或者,第一指示信息可以包含在第一信息之外。It should be noted that, in the case where the first information is sent by the network device to the terminal, the first indication information is included in the first information, or the first indication information may be included outside the first information.

在一些实施例中,所述第一偏移量为基于协议约定确定的,或者为网络设备指示的。例如第一偏移量可以为正整数,也可以为负整数。In some embodiments, the first offset is determined based on a protocol agreement or is indicated by a network device. For example, the first offset can be a positive integer or a negative integer.

例如,在网络设备指示第一偏移量的情况下,网络设备可以通过第一指示信息携带第一偏移量和第一索引。或者,网络设备可以在发送第一指示信息之前,预先将第一偏移量指示给终端,例如,网络设备可以通过第一指示信息之前的RRC信令(也可以称作RRC消息)携带第一偏移量或第一偏移量的索引发送至终端。For example, when the network device indicates the first offset, the network device may carry the first offset and the first index through the first indication information. Alternatively, the network device may indicate the first offset to the terminal in advance before sending the first indication information. For example, the network device may carry the first offset or the index of the first offset through RRC signaling (also referred to as RRC message) before the first indication information and send it to the terminal.

例如,在第一偏移量为基于协议约定确定的情况下,网络设备可以不必向终端指 示第一偏移量,例如第一指示信息可以仅携带第一索引,而不携带第一偏移量。终端可以根据协议约定确定第一偏移量。For example, when the first offset is determined based on a protocol agreement, the network device may not need to indicate to the terminal The first indication information may indicate the first offset, for example, the first indication information may only carry the first index but not the first offset. The terminal may determine the first offset according to the protocol agreement.

另外,例如,在第一偏移量为基于协议约定确定的情况下,终端基于协议约定可以确定多个第一偏移量,还可以基于协议约定确定第一偏移量与第一索引的关联关系,进而终端可以根据第一偏移量与第一索引的关联关系,确定网络设备指示的第一索引对应的第一偏移量。据此,有利于灵活地确定第一偏移量。In addition, for example, in the case where the first offset is determined based on a protocol agreement, the terminal can determine multiple first offsets based on the protocol agreement, and can also determine the association between the first offset and the first index based on the protocol agreement, and then the terminal can determine the first offset corresponding to the first index indicated by the network device based on the association between the first offset and the first index. Accordingly, it is conducive to flexibly determining the first offset.

在一些实施例中,所述根据第一信息确定在多个时域单元中的至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,包括:In some embodiments, determining, according to the first information, a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among the plurality of time domain units comprises:

确定在所述第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为所述第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略,在所述第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为第二索引对应的第二调制编码策略,其中,所述第二索引根据所述第一索引和所述第一偏移量确定;或者,Determine that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index, and the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is the second modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the second index, wherein the second index is determined according to the first index and the first offset; or

确定在所述第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为所述第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略,在所述第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为第二索引对应的第二调制编码策略,其中,所述第二索引根据所述第一索引和所述第一偏移量确定。Determine that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index, and the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit is the second modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the second index, wherein the second index is determined based on the first index and the first offset.

在一些实施例中,网络设备可以向终端发送第一指示信息,第一指示信息可以包括一个第一索引,由于一个索引与一个调制编码策略对应,那么为了确定第一调制编码策略和第二调制编码策略,终端可以根据第一索引和第一偏移量确定第二索引,从而第一索引和第二索引可以分别对应调制编码策略,例如第一索引对应第一调制编码策略,第二索引对应第二调制编码策略。In some embodiments, the network device may send a first indication message to the terminal, and the first indication message may include a first index. Since an index corresponds to a modulation and coding strategy, in order to determine the first modulation and coding strategy and the second modulation and coding strategy, the terminal may determine the second index based on the first index and the first offset, so that the first index and the second index may correspond to the modulation and coding strategies respectively, for example, the first index corresponds to the first modulation and coding strategy, and the second index corresponds to the second modulation and coding strategy.

其中,第一索引可以作为参考索引,为了确定第二调制编码策略,终端可以在参考索引的基础加上(或减去)第一偏移量,得到第二索引,进而确定第二索引对应的调制编码策略为第二调制编码策略。Among them, the first index can be used as a reference index. In order to determine the second modulation and coding strategy, the terminal can add (or subtract) the first offset based on the reference index to obtain the second index, and then determine that the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the second index is the second modulation and coding strategy.

当终端确定在第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为所述第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略,可以根据第一索引和第一偏移量确定第二索引,以及确定第二索引对应的第二调制编码策略,那么可以将第二调制编码策略作为在第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。When the terminal determines that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index, the second index can be determined based on the first index and the first offset, and the second modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the second index can be determined. Then, the second modulation and coding strategy can be used as the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit.

当终端确定在第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为所述第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略,可以根据第一索引和第一偏移量确定第二索引,以及确定第二索引对应的第二调制编码策略,那么可以将第二调制编码策略作为在第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。When the terminal determines that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index, the second index can be determined based on the first index and the first offset, and the second modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the second index can be determined. Then, the second modulation and coding strategy can be used as the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit.

在一些实施例中,调制编码策略确定方法还包括:In some embodiments, the modulation and coding strategy determination method further includes:

根据网络设备的指示确定在所述第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为所述第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略;或者,Determine, according to an instruction of a network device, that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index; or,

根据网络设备的指示确定在所述第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为所述第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略。According to the instruction of the network device, the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is determined to be the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index.

在一些实施例中,网络设备可以向终端发送第一指示信息,第一指示信息可以包括一个第一索引,由于一个索引与一个调制编码策略对应,终端还需要确定第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略,是第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,还是第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。 In some embodiments, the network device may send a first indication message to the terminal, and the first indication message may include a first index. Since an index corresponds to a modulation and coding strategy, the terminal also needs to determine whether the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit or the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit.

在这种情况下,网络设备可以指示第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略,是第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,还是第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。In this case, the network device may indicate whether the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index is a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit or a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit.

例如,在网络设备指示第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略是第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略时,终端根据网络设备的指示可以确定在第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略。For example, when the network device indicates that the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit, the terminal can determine, according to the indication of the network device, that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index.

例如,在网络设备指示第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略是第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略时,终端根据网络设备的指示可以确定在第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略。For example, when the network device indicates that the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit, the terminal can determine, according to the indication of the network device, that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index.

在一些实施例中,调制编码策略确定方法还包括:In some embodiments, the modulation and coding strategy determination method further includes:

根据协议约定确定在所述第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为所述第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略;或者,Determine, according to a protocol agreement, that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index; or,

根据协议约定确定在所述第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为所述第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略。According to the protocol agreement, the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is determined to be the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index.

在一些实施例中,网络设备可以向终端发送第一指示信息,第一指示信息可以包括一个第一索引,由于一个索引与一个调制编码策略对应,终端还需要确定第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略,是第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,还是第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。In some embodiments, the network device may send a first indication message to the terminal, and the first indication message may include a first index. Since an index corresponds to a modulation and coding strategy, the terminal also needs to determine whether the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit or the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit.

在这种情况下,协议约定可以确定第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略,是第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,还是第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。In this case, the protocol agreement can determine whether the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit or the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit.

例如,在协议约定确定第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略是第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略时,终端根据协议约定可以确定在第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略。For example, when the protocol agreement determines that the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit, the terminal can determine, according to the protocol agreement, that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index.

例如,在协议约定确定第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略是第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略时,终端根据协议约定可以确定在第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略。For example, when the protocol agreement determines that the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit, the terminal can determine, according to the protocol agreement, that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index.

图6是根据本公开的实施例示出的一种上行子带的示意图。FIG6 is a schematic diagram showing an uplink subband according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

以子带包括上行子带,时域单元包括时隙,网络设备在下行时隙为终端配置上行子带为例。如图6所示,终端根据TDD UL-DL configuration确定的时隙结构为DDDDDDSUUU,一个TDD UL-DL周期(periodicity)包括10个时隙,slot#0至slot#9,网络设备在slot#0至slot#3中配置了上行子带。For example, a subband includes an uplink subband, a time domain unit includes a time slot, and a network device configures an uplink subband for a terminal in a downlink time slot. As shown in FIG6 , the time slot structure determined by the terminal according to the TDD UL-DL configuration is DDDDDDSUUU, and a TDD UL-DL periodicity includes 10 time slots, slot#0 to slot#9, and the network device configures an uplink subband in slot#0 to slot#3.

图7是根据本公开的实施例示出的一种数据通信的示意图。FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing a data communication according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

如图7所示,例如,终端在多个时隙上进行的数据通信包括PUSCH repetition,PUSCH repetition的重复发送次数为4,4次重复发送的PUSCH位于TDD UL-DL周期#1中的slot#8和slot#9,以及TDD UL-DL周期#2中slot#0和slot#1。As shown in Figure 7, for example, the data communication performed by the terminal on multiple time slots includes PUSCH repetition, the number of repeated transmissions of PUSCH repetition is 4, and the 4 repeated PUSCHs are located in slot #8 and slot #9 in TDD UL-DL cycle #1, and slot #0 and slot #1 in TDD UL-DL cycle #2.

由于在slot#0和slot#1上配置有上行子带,网络设备在周期#2的slot#0和slot#1上不仅可以在上行子带上接收PUSCH repetition,还可以在上行子带以外的频域资源进行下行通信,例如下行通信可以对接收PUSCH repetition的过程造成干扰。而在周期#1的slot#8和slot#9上则只接收PUSCH,并不进行下行通信,所以并不存在下行通信对接收PUSCH过程的干扰。可见,在周期#2的slot#0和slot#1上的干扰,相对于周期#1的slot#8和slot#9上的干扰较强。 Since uplink subbands are configured on slot#0 and slot#1, the network device can not only receive PUSCH repetition on the uplink subband in slot#0 and slot#1 of cycle #2, but also perform downlink communication on frequency domain resources outside the uplink subband. For example, downlink communication can interfere with the process of receiving PUSCH repetition. However, in slot#8 and slot#9 of cycle #1, only PUSCH is received, and downlink communication is not performed. Therefore, there is no interference of downlink communication on the process of receiving PUSCH. It can be seen that the interference on slot#0 and slot#1 of cycle #2 is stronger than the interference on slot#8 and slot#9 of cycle #1.

如果仅考虑周期#1中slot#8和slot#9上的干扰情况确定调制编码策略,并将该调制编码策略应用于周期#2的slot#0和slot#1,由于周期#2中slot#0和slot#1上的干扰相对较强,在采用该调制编码策略时,难以缓解周期#2中slot#0和slot#1上的干扰,容易影响网络设备在周期#2中slot#0和slot#1上接收PUSCH repetition的通信质量。If the modulation and coding strategy is determined by only considering the interference conditions in slot#8 and slot#9 in cycle #1, and the modulation and coding strategy is applied to slot#0 and slot#1 in cycle #2, since the interference in slot#0 and slot#1 in cycle #2 is relatively strong, it is difficult to alleviate the interference in slot#0 and slot#1 in cycle #2 when the modulation and coding strategy is adopted, which is easy to affect the communication quality of the network device receiving PUSCH repetition in slot#0 and slot#1 in cycle #2.

在本公开的实施例中,终端可以确定第一索引,进而终端可以根据第一索引和第一偏移量确定第二索引。例如,终端根据网络设备的指示或者协议约定确定第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略是第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。In an embodiment of the present disclosure, the terminal may determine the first index, and then the terminal may determine the second index according to the first index and the first offset. For example, the terminal determines that the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit according to an instruction of the network device or a protocol agreement.

以第一索引index#1为13,第一偏移量offset为2为例,终端可以确定第二索引index#2=index#1+offset=15。进而可以在索引与调制编码策略的关系表中确定索引13对应的调制编码策略(例如调制编码策略等级为13)为在周期#2中slot#0和slot#1上发送PUSCH repetition的调制编码策略,以及确定索引15对应的调制编码策略(例如调制编码策略等级为15)为周期#1中在slot#8和slot#9上发送PUSCH repetition的调制编码策略。Taking the first index index#1 as 13 and the first offset offset as 2 as an example, the terminal can determine the second index index#2=index#1+offset=15. Then, in the relationship table between index and modulation coding strategy, it can be determined that the modulation coding strategy corresponding to index 13 (for example, the modulation coding strategy level is 13) is the modulation coding strategy for sending PUSCH repetition on slot#0 and slot#1 in cycle#2, and the modulation coding strategy corresponding to index 15 (for example, the modulation coding strategy level is 15) is the modulation coding strategy for sending PUSCH repetition on slot#8 and slot#9 in cycle#1.

由于索引13对应的调制编码策略相对于索引15对应的调制编码策略,在干扰相对较强的情况下,更有利于保证数据通信的通信质量,因此,在干扰较强的周期#2中slot#0和slot#1上进行PUSCH repetition通信采用索引13对应的调制编码策略,有利于保证良好的通信质量。Since the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index 13 is more conducive to ensuring the communication quality of data communication when the interference is relatively strong than the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index 15, the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index 13 is used for PUSCH repetition communication in slot #0 and slot #1 in period #2 where the interference is relatively strong, which is conducive to ensuring good communication quality.

图8是根据本公开的实施例示出的另一种数据通信的示意图。FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram showing another data communication according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

如图8所示,例如,终端在多个时隙上进行的数据通信包括CG PUSCH(例如Type-1 CG PUSCH),CG PUSCH的传输周期为5个时隙。图8中示出了三次CG PUSCH传输,分别位于TDD UL-DL周期#1中的slot#8,以及TDD UL-DL周期#2中slot#3和slot#8。As shown in FIG8 , for example, the data communication performed by the terminal on multiple time slots includes CG PUSCH (e.g., Type-1 CG PUSCH), and the transmission period of CG PUSCH is 5 time slots. FIG8 shows three CG PUSCH transmissions, which are respectively located in slot #8 in TDD UL-DL cycle #1, and slot #3 and slot #8 in TDD UL-DL cycle #2.

由于在slot#3上配置有上行子带,网络设备在周期#2的slot#3上不仅可以在上行子带上接收CG PUSCH,还可以在上行子带以外的频域资源进行下行通信,例如下行通信可以对接收CG PUSCH的过程造成干扰。而在周期#1和周期#2的slot#8上则只接收PUSCH,并不进行下行通信,所以并不存在下行通信对接收CG PUSCH过程的干扰。可见,在周期#2的slot#3上的干扰,相对于周期#1和周期#2的slot#8上的干扰较强。Since an uplink subband is configured on slot#3, the network device can not only receive CG PUSCH on the uplink subband on slot#3 of cycle #2, but also perform downlink communication on frequency domain resources outside the uplink subband. For example, downlink communication can interfere with the process of receiving CG PUSCH. However, only PUSCH is received on slot#8 of cycle #1 and cycle #2, and downlink communication is not performed. Therefore, there is no interference of downlink communication on the process of receiving CG PUSCH. It can be seen that the interference on slot#3 of cycle #2 is stronger than the interference on slot#8 of cycle #1 and cycle #2.

如果仅考虑周期#1和周期#2中slot#8上的干扰情况确定调制编码策略,并将该调制编码策略应用于周期#2的slot#3,由于周期#2中slot#3上的干扰相对较强,在采用该调制编码策略时,难以缓解周期#2中slot#3上的干扰,容易影响在周期#2中slot#3上接收CG PUSCH的通信质量。If the modulation and coding strategy is determined by considering only the interference conditions in slot #8 in cycle #1 and cycle #2, and the modulation and coding strategy is applied to slot #3 in cycle #2, since the interference in slot #3 in cycle #2 is relatively strong, it is difficult to alleviate the interference in slot #3 in cycle #2 when the modulation and coding strategy is adopted, which can easily affect the communication quality of receiving CG PUSCH in slot #3 in cycle #2.

在本公开的实施例中,终端可以确定第一索引,进而终端可以根据第一索引和第一偏移量确定第二索引。例如,终端根据网络设备的指示或者协议约定确定第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略是第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。In an embodiment of the present disclosure, the terminal may determine the first index, and then the terminal may determine the second index according to the first index and the first offset. For example, the terminal determines that the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit according to an instruction of the network device or a protocol agreement.

以第一索引index#1为13,第一偏移量offset为2为例,终端可以确定第二索引index#2=index#1+offset=15。进而可以在索引与调制编码策略的关系表中确定索引13对应的调制编码策略(例如调制编码策略等级为13)为在周期#2中slot#3上发送CG PUSCH的调制编码策略,以及确定索引15对应的调制编码策略(例如调制编码策略等级为15)为周期#1和周期#2中slot#8上发送CG PUSCH的调制编码策略。Taking the first index index#1 as 13 and the first offset offset as 2 as an example, the terminal can determine the second index index#2=index#1+offset=15. Then, in the relationship table between index and modulation coding strategy, it can be determined that the modulation coding strategy corresponding to index 13 (for example, the modulation coding strategy level is 13) is the modulation coding strategy for sending CG PUSCH on slot#3 in cycle#2, and the modulation coding strategy corresponding to index 15 (for example, the modulation coding strategy level is 15) is the modulation coding strategy for sending CG PUSCH on slot#8 in cycle#1 and cycle#2.

由于索引13对应的调制编码策略相对于索引15对应的调制编码策略,在干扰相对较强的情况下,更有利于保证数据通信的通信质量,因此,在干扰较强的周期#2中slot#3上进行CG PUSCH通信采用索引13对应的调制编码策略,有利于保证良好的通信质量。 Since the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index 13 is more conducive to ensuring the communication quality of data communication when the interference is relatively strong than the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index 15, the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index 13 is used for CG PUSCH communication in slot #3 in period #2 where the interference is relatively strong, which is conducive to ensuring good communication quality.

在一些实施例中,第一索引可以是网络设备指示的,但是第一偏移量是协议约定的,第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略是第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,还是第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,也是协议约定的。In some embodiments, the first index may be indicated by a network device, but the first offset is agreed upon by the protocol, and whether the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit or the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is also agreed upon by the protocol.

例如,终端根据协议约定确定第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略是第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,且第一偏移量offset为-6。当终端接收到网络设备发送的信息,确定第一索引index#1为二进制10000,也即十进制的16,可以确定第二索引index#2=index#1+offse=10。进而可以确定索引16对应的调制编码策略为在第二类时域单元(非SBFD slot)上数据通信的调制编码策略,索引10对应的调制编码策略为在第一类时域单元(SBFD slot)上数据通信的调制编码策略。For example, the terminal determines according to the protocol that the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit, and the first offset offset is -6. When the terminal receives the information sent by the network device, it determines that the first index index#1 is binary 10000, that is, decimal 16, and it can be determined that the second index index#2 = index#1 + offset = 10. It can then be determined that the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index 16 is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit (non-SBFD slot), and the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index 10 is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit (SBFD slot).

在一些实施例中,所述第一信息用于指示所述终端根据网络设备指示的一个调制编码策略对应的一个第一索引和多个调制编码策略表(MCS table)确定在所述多个时域单元中的至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。In some embodiments, the first information is used to instruct the terminal to determine a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among the multiple time domain units based on a first index corresponding to a modulation and coding strategy indicated by a network device and multiple modulation and coding strategy tables (MCS tables).

例如,多个调制编码策略表可以是协议约定的,或者是网络设备预先(例如在指示第一索引之前)配置给终端的,调制编码策略表可以表征调制编码策略与索引之间的关联关系。多个调制编码策略表中,每个调制编码策略表可以不同,也即调制编码策略与索引之间的关联关系可以不同,那么终端根据一个第一索引,在每个调制编码策略表中可以分别确定不同的调制编码策略。据此,终端可以确定至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,并确保第一类时域单元和第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略不同。For example, multiple modulation and coding strategy tables may be agreed upon by the protocol, or may be pre-configured to the terminal by the network device (for example, before indicating the first index), and the modulation and coding strategy table may characterize the association between the modulation and coding strategy and the index. In multiple modulation and coding strategy tables, each modulation and coding strategy table may be different, that is, the association between the modulation and coding strategy and the index may be different, then the terminal may determine different modulation and coding strategies in each modulation and coding strategy table according to a first index. Accordingly, the terminal may determine the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit, and ensure that the modulation and coding strategies for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit are different.

在一些实施例中,调制编码策略表可以根据协议约定确定,或者,可以由网络设备指示,例如网络设备可以通过RRC信令(也可以称作RRC消息)向终端指示多个调制编码策略表。In some embodiments, the modulation and coding strategy table may be determined according to a protocol agreement, or may be indicated by a network device. For example, the network device may indicate multiple modulation and coding strategy tables to the terminal via RRC signaling (also referred to as an RRC message).

在一些实施例中,所述多个调制编码策略表为两个调制编码策略表,其中,所述第一索引在一个调制编码策略表中对应的调制编码策略为在所述第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,所述第一索引在另一个调制编码策略表中对应的调制编码策略为在所述第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。In some embodiments, the multiple modulation and coding strategy tables are two modulation and coding strategy tables, wherein the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index in one modulation and coding strategy table is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit, and the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index in another modulation and coding strategy table is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit.

例如,终端中预先存储了两个调制编码策略表,终端根据第一指示信息可以确定一个第一索引index#1。例如两个调制编码策略表为MCS table#1和MCS table#2。进而终端可以在MCS table#1中确定index#1对应的调制编码策略,例如为MCS等级13,以及在MCS table#2中确定index#1对应的调制编码策略,例如为MCS等级15。For example, two modulation and coding strategy tables are pre-stored in the terminal, and the terminal can determine a first index index#1 according to the first indication information. For example, the two modulation and coding strategy tables are MCS table#1 and MCS table#2. Then, the terminal can determine the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index#1 in MCS table#1, for example, MCS level 13, and determine the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index#1 in MCS table#2, for example, MCS level 15.

在一些实施例中,网络设备可以向终端指示两个调制编码策略表与第一类时域单元和第二类时域单元的关联关系,或者,终端可以基于协议约定确定两个调制编码策略表与第一类时域单元和第二类时域单元的关联关系。In some embodiments, the network device can indicate to the terminal the association relationship between the two modulation and coding strategy tables and the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit, or the terminal can determine the association relationship between the two modulation and coding strategy tables and the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit based on protocol agreement.

例如,两个调制编码策略表与第一类时域单元和第二类时域单元的关联关系包括:MCS table#1与第一类时域单元相关联,MCS table#2与第二类时域单元相关联。那么终端根据第一索引在MCS table#1中确定的调制编码策略可以作为在第一类时域单元中进行数据通信所使用的调制编码策略,根据第一索引在MCS table#2中确定的调制编码策略可以作为在第二类时域单元中进行数据通信所使用的调制编码策略。For example, the association relationship between the two modulation and coding strategy tables and the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit includes: MCS table#1 is associated with the first type of time domain unit, and MCS table#2 is associated with the second type of time domain unit. Then the modulation and coding strategy determined by the terminal in MCS table#1 according to the first index can be used as the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication in the first type of time domain unit, and the modulation and coding strategy determined in MCS table#2 according to the first index can be used as the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication in the second type of time domain unit.

以上实施例主要示例性的描述了终端根据第一信息确定一个第一索引的情况。下面通过几个实施例示例性描述终端根据第一信息确定多个第一索引的情况。The above embodiments mainly exemplarily describe the case where the terminal determines a first index according to the first information. The following describes the case where the terminal determines multiple first indexes according to the first information through several embodiments.

在一些实施例中,所述第一信息用于指示所述终端根据多个调制编码策略对应的多个第一索引,确定在所述多个时域单元中的至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码 策略。In some embodiments, the first information is used to instruct the terminal to determine the modulation and coding strategy of data communication on at least one time domain unit in the multiple time domain units according to multiple first indexes corresponding to multiple modulation and coding strategies. Strategy.

网络设备可以通过第一指示信息向终端指示多个第一索引,其中,一个第一索引可以对应一个调制编码策略,那么终端根据多个第一索引可以确定多个调制编码策略,进而可以在多个调制编码策略中确定在第一类时域单元中进行数据通信所使用的调制编码策略,以及在第二类时域单元中进行数据通信所使用的调制编码策略,从而确定在至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。The network device can indicate multiple first indexes to the terminal through the first indication information, where one first index can correspond to a modulation and coding strategy. The terminal can then determine multiple modulation and coding strategies based on the multiple first indexes, and further determine the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication in the first type of time domain unit and the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication in the second type of time domain unit from the multiple modulation and coding strategies, thereby determining the modulation and coding strategy for data communication in at least one time domain unit.

在一些实施例中,所述多个第一索引为两个第一索引,其中,一个第一索引对应的调制编码策略为在所述第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,另一个第一索引对应的调制编码策略为在所述第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。In some embodiments, the multiple first indexes are two first indexes, wherein the modulation coding strategy corresponding to one first index is the modulation coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit, and the modulation coding strategy corresponding to another first index is the modulation coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit.

例如,例如,数据通信包括PUSCH repetition,网络设备在调度PUSCH的上行授权(UL grant)内,可以携带两个调制编码策略指示信息(MCS indication),例如两个调制编码策略的第一索引,分别为index#1和index#2。For example, data communication includes PUSCH repetition, and the network device can carry two modulation and coding strategy indication information (MCS indication) in the uplink grant (UL grant) scheduling PUSCH, such as the first indexes of two modulation and coding strategies, index#1 and index#2 respectively.

终端可以确定index#1对应的调制编码策略MCS#1,以及确定index#2对应的调制编码策略MCS#2,由于MCS#1和MCS#2可以不同,据此,终端可以确定第一类时域单元和第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,并确保第一类时域单元和第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略不同。The terminal can determine the modulation and coding strategy MCS#1 corresponding to index#1, and determine the modulation and coding strategy MCS#2 corresponding to index#2. Since MCS#1 and MCS#2 can be different, the terminal can determine the modulation and coding strategies for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit, and ensure that the modulation and coding strategies for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit are different.

在一些实施例中,网络设备可以向终端指示两个第一索引与第一类时域单元和第二类时域单元的关联关系,或者,终端可以基于协议约定确定两个第一索引与第一类时域单元和第二类时域单元的关联关系。In some embodiments, the network device can indicate to the terminal the association relationship between the two first indexes and the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit, or the terminal can determine the association relationship between the two first indexes and the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit based on protocol agreement.

例如,两个第一索引与第一类时域单元和第二类时域单元的关联关系可以包括以下至少之一:按照索引从小到大,分别关联第一类时域单元和第二类时域单元;按照索引从大到小,分别关联第一类时域单元和第二类时域单元。For example, the association relationship between the two first indexes and the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit may include at least one of the following: associating the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit respectively according to the index from small to large; associating the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit respectively according to the index from large to small.

以按照索引从小到大,分别关联第一类时域单元和第二类时域单元为例,index#1可以关联第一类时域单元,那么index#1对应的调制编码策略MCS#1可以作为在第一类时域单元进行数据通信所用的调制编码策略;index#2可以关联第二类时域单元,那么index#2对应的调制编码策略MCS#2可以作为在第二类时域单元进行数据通信所用的调制编码策略。Taking the example of associating the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit according to the index from small to large, index#1 can be associated with the first type of time domain unit, then the modulation and coding strategy MCS#1 corresponding to index#1 can be used as the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication in the first type of time domain unit; index#2 can be associated with the second type of time domain unit, then the modulation and coding strategy MCS#2 corresponding to index#2 can be used as the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication in the second type of time domain unit.

需要说明的是,终端确定的在第一类时域单元上数据通信所使用的调制编码策略,和网络设备确定的在第一类时域单元上数据通信所使用的调制编码策略,是相同的,据此,终端和网络设备在第一类时域单元上进行数据通信可以采用相同的调制编码策略。终端确定的在第二类时域单元上数据通信所使用的调制编码策略,和网络设备确定的在第二类时域单元上数据通信所使用的调制编码策略,也是相同的,据此,终端和网络设备在第二类时域单元上进行数据通信可以采用相同的调制编码策略。It should be noted that the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the first type of time domain unit determined by the terminal and the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the first type of time domain unit determined by the network device are the same, and accordingly, the terminal and the network device can use the same modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit. The modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the second type of time domain unit determined by the terminal and the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the second type of time domain unit determined by the network device are also the same, and accordingly, the terminal and the network device can use the same modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit.

而网络设备确定在多个时域单元中的至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略的方式,与终端确定在多个时域单元中的至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略的方式,则可以是相对应的。例如,终端根据网络设备指示的第一索引和第一偏移量确定在第一类时域单元上数据通信所使用的调制编码策略以及在第二类时域单元上数据通信所使用的调制编码策略,网络设备也可以根据指示给终端的第一索引和第一偏移量确定在第一类时域单元上数据通信所使用的调制编码策略以及在第二类时域单元上数据通信所使用的调制编码策略;例如,终端根据网络设备指示的多个第一索引确定在第一类时域单元上数据通信所使用的调制编码策略以及在第二类时域单元上数据通信所使用的调制编码策略,网络设备也可以根据指示给终端的多个第一索引和第一偏移量确定 在第一类时域单元上数据通信所使用的调制编码策略以及在第二类时域单元上数据通信所使用的调制编码策略。具体可以参考前文实施例,此处不再赘述。The way in which the network device determines the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among multiple time domain units and the way in which the terminal determines the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among multiple time domain units may correspond. For example, the terminal determines the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the second type of time domain unit according to the first index and the first offset indicated by the network device. The network device may also determine the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the second type of time domain unit according to the first index and the first offset indicated to the terminal. For example, the terminal determines the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the second type of time domain unit according to the multiple first indices indicated by the network device. The network device may also determine the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the second type of time domain unit according to the multiple first indices indicated to the terminal. The modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the second type of time domain unit can be specifically referred to the above embodiments and will not be described in detail here.

第二方面,本公开的实施例提出了调制编码策略确定方法。图9是根据本公开的实施例示出的一种调制编码策略确定方法的示意流程图。本实施例所示的调制编码策略确定方法可以由网络设备执行。In a second aspect, an embodiment of the present disclosure proposes a method for determining a modulation and coding strategy. Figure 9 is a schematic flow chart of a method for determining a modulation and coding strategy according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. The method for determining a modulation and coding strategy shown in this embodiment can be executed by a network device.

如图9所示,调制编码策略确定方法可以包括以下步骤:As shown in FIG. 9 , the modulation and coding strategy determination method may include the following steps:

在步骤S901中,向终端发送第一信息,其中,第一信息用于确定在多个时域单元中的至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,多个时域单元包括配置有子带的第一类时域单元和未配置子带的第二类时域单元。In step S901, first information is sent to the terminal, wherein the first information is used to determine a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among multiple time domain units, and the multiple time domain units include a first type of time domain unit configured with a subband and a second type of time domain unit not configured with a subband.

在一些实施例中,网络设备可以通过RRC信令(也可以称作RRC消息)将第一信息发送至终端。In some embodiments, the network device may send the first information to the terminal via RRC signaling (also referred to as an RRC message).

在一些实施例中,在终端在多个时域单元中与网络设备进行数据通信,且多个时域单元包括第一类时域单元(例如SBFD时域单元)和第二类时域单元(例如非SBFD时域单元)的情况下,网络设备可以向终端发送第一信息,以便终端可以根据第一信息确定至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,其中,第一类时域单元和第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略可以不同。In some embodiments, when a terminal communicates data with a network device in multiple time domain units, and the multiple time domain units include a first type of time domain unit (e.g., an SBFD time domain unit) and a second type of time domain unit (e.g., a non-SBFD time domain unit), the network device may send first information to the terminal so that the terminal can determine a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit based on the first information, wherein the modulation and coding strategies for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit may be different.

据此,便于终端采用不同的调制编码策略应用于第一类时域单元和第二类时域单元上的数据通信,有利于缓解干扰对第一类时域单元中数据通信的影响,进而保证在第一类时域单元中数据通信的通信质量。Accordingly, it is convenient for the terminal to adopt different modulation and coding strategies for data communication in the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit, which is conducive to alleviating the impact of interference on data communication in the first type of time domain unit, and thus ensuring the communication quality of data communication in the first type of time domain unit.

在一些实施例中,数据通信并不限于终端接收重复传输的物理下行共享信道,还可以包括其他类型的数据通信,例如,数据通信包括以下至少之一:In some embodiments, data communication is not limited to the terminal receiving the repeatedly transmitted physical downlink shared channel, and may also include other types of data communication. For example, data communication includes at least one of the following:

在多个时域单元上重复接收的物理下行共享信道;A physical downlink shared channel repeatedly received over a plurality of time domain units;

在多个时域单元上重复发送的物理上行共享信道(PUSCH);Physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) repeatedly transmitted over multiple time domain units;

在多个时域单元上基于配置授权(CG)方式发送的物理上行共享信道;A physical uplink shared channel transmitted in multiple time domain units based on a configuration grant (CG) method;

在多个时域单元上基于触发方式接收的物理下行共享信道。A physical downlink shared channel is received in a triggered manner on multiple time domain units.

在一些实施例中,重复发送的物理上行共享信道(PUSCH repetition),包括以下至少之一:PUSCH repetition Type A,PUSCH repetition Type B。In some embodiments, the repeatedly transmitted physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH repetition) includes at least one of the following: PUSCH repetition Type A, PUSCH repetition Type B.

在一些实施例中,基于配置授权方式发送的物理上行共享信道,包括以下至少之一:type-1 CG PUSCH、type-2 CG PUSCH。In some embodiments, the physical uplink shared channel sent based on the configuration authorization method includes at least one of the following: type-1 CG PUSCH, type-2 CG PUSCH.

在一些实施例中,基于触发方式接收的物理下行共享信道包括但不限于半持续调度(SPS)物理下行共享信道,其中,半持续调度物理下行共享信道可以通过下行控制信息(DCI)触发。In some embodiments, the physical downlink shared channel received based on the triggering manner includes but is not limited to a semi-persistent scheduling (SPS) physical downlink shared channel, wherein the semi-persistent scheduling physical downlink shared channel can be triggered by downlink control information (DCI).

在一些实施例中,时域单元包括以下至少之一:帧、子帧、时隙(slot)、符号(symbol),其中,符号例如可以为OFDM符号。In some embodiments, the time domain unit includes at least one of the following: a frame, a subframe, a time slot, and a symbol, wherein the symbol may be, for example, an OFDM symbol.

在一些实施例中,第一信息用于指示终端根据一个第一偏移量以及网络设备指示的一个调制编码策略对应的一个第一索引,确定在第一类时域单元上数据通信的第一调制编码策略以及在第二类时域单元数据通信的第二调制编码策略。In some embodiments, the first information is used to indicate that the terminal determines a first modulation and coding strategy for data communication on a first type of time domain unit and a second modulation and coding strategy for data communication on a second type of time domain unit based on a first offset and a first index corresponding to a modulation and coding strategy indicated by a network device.

在一些实施例中,终端中可以存储有索引(index)与调制编码策略的关联关系,其中,关联关系例如可以为调制编码策略与索引之前的关系表。 In some embodiments, the terminal may store an association relationship between an index and a modulation and coding strategy, wherein the association relationship may be, for example, a relationship table between the modulation and coding strategy and the index.

网络设备可以向终端发送第一指示信息,第一指示信息可以包括一个第一索引。终端可以在上述关联关系中确定第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略,还可以根据第一信息的指示基于第一索引和第一偏移量确定第二编码策略。进而可以根据第一调制编码策略和第二调制编码策略中的一个调制编码策略在第一类时域单元上进行数据通信,以及根据第一调制编码策略和第二调制编码策略中的另一个调制编码策略在第二类时域单元上进行数据通信。The network device may send a first indication information to the terminal, and the first indication information may include a first index. The terminal may determine the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index in the above association relationship, and may also determine the second coding strategy based on the first index and the first offset according to the indication of the first information. Then, data communication may be performed on the first type of time domain unit according to one of the first modulation and coding strategies and the second modulation and coding strategies, and data communication may be performed on the second type of time domain unit according to the other modulation and coding strategy of the first modulation and coding strategy and the second modulation and coding strategy.

据此,可以确保针对第一类时域单元和第二类时域单元确定不同的调制编码策略,便于采用不同的调制编码策略应用于第一类时域单元和第二类时域单元上的数据通信,有利于缓解干扰对第一类时域单元中数据通信的影响,进而保证在第一类时域单元中数据通信的通信质量。Based on this, it can be ensured that different modulation and coding strategies are determined for the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit, which facilitates the use of different modulation and coding strategies for data communication in the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit, and is beneficial to alleviating the impact of interference on data communication in the first type of time domain unit, thereby ensuring the communication quality of data communication in the first type of time domain unit.

在一些实施例中,第一偏移量为基于协议约定确定的,或者为网络设备指示的。例如第一偏移量可以为正整数,也可以为负整数。In some embodiments, the first offset is determined based on a protocol agreement or is indicated by a network device. For example, the first offset may be a positive integer or a negative integer.

例如,在网络设备指示第一偏移量的情况下,网络设备可以通过第一指示信息携带第一偏移量和第一索引。或者,网络设备可以在发送第一指示信息之前,预先将第一偏移量指示给终端,例如,网络设备可以通过第一指示信息之前的RRC信令(也可以称作RRC消息)携带第一偏移量或第一偏移量的索引发送至终端。For example, when the network device indicates the first offset, the network device may carry the first offset and the first index through the first indication information. Alternatively, the network device may indicate the first offset to the terminal in advance before sending the first indication information. For example, the network device may carry the first offset or the index of the first offset through RRC signaling (also referred to as RRC message) before the first indication information and send it to the terminal.

例如,在第一偏移量为基于协议约定确定的情况下,网络设备可以不必向终端指示第一偏移量,例如第一指示信息可以仅携带第一索引,而不携带第一偏移量。终端可以根据协议约定确定第一偏移量。For example, when the first offset is determined based on a protocol agreement, the network device may not need to indicate the first offset to the terminal, for example, the first indication information may only carry the first index but not the first offset. The terminal may determine the first offset based on the protocol agreement.

在一些实施例中,方法还包括:In some embodiments, the method further comprises:

指示终端确定在第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略;或者,instructing the terminal to determine that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index; or,

指示终端确定在第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略。The terminal is instructed to determine that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index.

在一些实施例中,网络设备可以向终端发送第一指示信息,第一指示信息可以包括一个第一索引,由于一个索引与一个调制编码策略对应,那么为了确定第一调制编码策略和第二调制编码策略,终端可以根据第一索引和第一偏移量确定第二索引,从而第一索引和第二索引可以分别对应调制编码策略,例如第一索引对应第一调制编码策略,第二索引对应第二调制编码策略。In some embodiments, the network device may send a first indication message to the terminal, and the first indication message may include a first index. Since an index corresponds to a modulation and coding strategy, in order to determine the first modulation and coding strategy and the second modulation and coding strategy, the terminal may determine the second index based on the first index and the first offset, so that the first index and the second index may correspond to the modulation and coding strategies respectively, for example, the first index corresponds to the first modulation and coding strategy, and the second index corresponds to the second modulation and coding strategy.

其中,第一索引可以作为参考索引,为了确定第二调制编码策略,终端可以在参考索引的基础加上(或减去)第一偏移量,得到第二索引,进而确定第二索引对应的调制编码策略为第二调制编码策略。Among them, the first index can be used as a reference index. In order to determine the second modulation and coding strategy, the terminal can add (or subtract) the first offset based on the reference index to obtain the second index, and then determine that the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the second index is the second modulation and coding strategy.

网络设备可以指示第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略,是第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,还是第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。The network device may indicate whether the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index is a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit or a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit.

例如,在网络设备指示第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略是第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略时,终端根据网络设备的指示可以确定在第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略。For example, when the network device indicates that the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit, the terminal can determine, according to the indication of the network device, that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index.

例如,在网络设备指示第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略是第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略时,终端根据网络设备的指示可以确定在第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略。 For example, when the network device indicates that the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit, the terminal can determine, according to the indication of the network device, that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index.

以子带包括上行子带,时域单元包括时隙,网络设备在下行时隙为终端配置上行子带为例。如图6所示,终端根据TDD UL-DL configuration确定的时隙结构为DDDDDDSUUU,一个TDD UL-DL周期(periodicity)包括10个时隙,slot#0至slot#9,网络设备在slot#0至slot#3中配置了上行子带。For example, a subband includes an uplink subband, a time domain unit includes a time slot, and a network device configures an uplink subband for a terminal in a downlink time slot. As shown in FIG6 , the time slot structure determined by the terminal according to the TDD UL-DL configuration is DDDDDDSUUU, and a TDD UL-DL periodicity includes 10 time slots, slot#0 to slot#9, and the network device configures an uplink subband in slot#0 to slot#3.

如图7所示,例如,终端在多个时隙上进行的数据通信包括PUSCH repetition,PUSCH repetition的重复发送次数为4,4次重复发送的PUSCH位于TDD UL-DL周期#1中的slot#8和slot#9,以及TDD UL-DL周期#2中slot#0和slot#1。As shown in Figure 7, for example, the data communication performed by the terminal on multiple time slots includes PUSCH repetition, the number of repeated transmissions of PUSCH repetition is 4, and the 4 repeated PUSCHs are located in slot #8 and slot #9 in TDD UL-DL cycle #1, and slot #0 and slot #1 in TDD UL-DL cycle #2.

由于在slot#0和slot#1上配置有上行子带,网络设备在周期#2的slot#0和slot#1上不仅可以在上行子带上接收PUSCH repetition,还可以在上行子带以外的频域资源进行下行通信,例如下行通信可以对接收PUSCH repetition的过程造成干扰。而在周期#1的slot#8和slot#9上则只接收PUSCH,并不进行下行通信,所以并不存在下行通信对接收PUSCH过程的干扰。可见,在周期#2的slot#0和slot#1上的干扰,相对于周期#1的slot#8和slot#9上的干扰较强。Since uplink subbands are configured on slot#0 and slot#1, the network device can not only receive PUSCH repetition on the uplink subband in slot#0 and slot#1 of cycle #2, but also perform downlink communication on frequency domain resources outside the uplink subband. For example, downlink communication can interfere with the process of receiving PUSCH repetition. However, in slot#8 and slot#9 of cycle #1, only PUSCH is received, and downlink communication is not performed, so there is no interference of downlink communication on the process of receiving PUSCH. It can be seen that the interference on slot#0 and slot#1 of cycle #2 is stronger than the interference on slot#8 and slot#9 of cycle #1.

如果仅考虑周期#1中slot#8和slot#9上的干扰情况确定调制编码策略,并将该调制编码策略应用于周期#2的slot#0和slot#1,由于周期#2中slot#0和slot#1上的干扰相对较强,在采用该调制编码策略时,难以缓解周期#2中slot#0和slot#1上的干扰,容易影响网络设备在周期#2中slot#0和slot#1上接收PUSCH repetition的通信质量。If the modulation and coding strategy is determined by only considering the interference conditions in slot#8 and slot#9 in cycle #1, and the modulation and coding strategy is applied to slot#0 and slot#1 in cycle #2, since the interference in slot#0 and slot#1 in cycle #2 is relatively strong, it is difficult to alleviate the interference in slot#0 and slot#1 in cycle #2 when the modulation and coding strategy is adopted, which is easy to affect the communication quality of the network device receiving PUSCH repetition in slot#0 and slot#1 in cycle #2.

在本公开的实施例中,终端可以确定第一索引,进而终端可以根据第一索引和第一偏移量确定第二索引。例如,终端根据网络设备的指示或者协议约定确定第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略是第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。In an embodiment of the present disclosure, the terminal may determine the first index, and then the terminal may determine the second index according to the first index and the first offset. For example, the terminal determines that the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit according to an instruction of the network device or a protocol agreement.

以第一索引index#1为13,第一偏移量offset为2为例,终端可以确定第二索引index#2=index#1+offset=15。进而可以在索引与调制编码策略的关系表中确定索引13对应的调制编码策略(例如调制编码策略等级为13)为在周期#2中slot#0和slot#1上发送PUSCH repetition的调制编码策略,以及确定索引15对应的调制编码策略(例如调制编码策略等级为15)为周期#1中在slot#8和slot#9上发送PUSCH repetition的调制编码策略。Taking the first index index#1 as 13 and the first offset offset as 2 as an example, the terminal can determine the second index index#2=index#1+offset=15. Then, in the relationship table between index and modulation coding strategy, it can be determined that the modulation coding strategy corresponding to index 13 (for example, the modulation coding strategy level is 13) is the modulation coding strategy for sending PUSCH repetition on slot#0 and slot#1 in cycle#2, and the modulation coding strategy corresponding to index 15 (for example, the modulation coding strategy level is 15) is the modulation coding strategy for sending PUSCH repetition on slot#8 and slot#9 in cycle#1.

由于索引13对应的调制编码策略相对于索引15对应的调制编码策略,在干扰相对较强的情况下,更有利于保证数据通信的通信质量,因此,在干扰较强的周期#2中slot#0和slot#1上进行PUSCH repetition通信采用索引13对应的调制编码策略,有利于保证良好的通信质量。Since the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index 13 is more conducive to ensuring the communication quality of data communication when the interference is relatively strong than the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index 15, the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index 13 is used for PUSCH repetition communication in slot #0 and slot #1 in period #2 where the interference is relatively strong, which is conducive to ensuring good communication quality.

相对应地,网络设备也可以按照上述方式确定调制编码策略,从而确定索引13对应的调制编码策略(例如调制编码策略等级为13)为在周期#2中slot#0和slot#1上接收PUSCH repetition的调制编码策略,以及确定索引15对应的调制编码策略(例如调制编码策略等级为15)为周期#1中在slot#8和slot#9上接收PUSCH repetition的调制编码策略。Correspondingly, the network device can also determine the modulation and coding strategy in the above manner, thereby determining the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index 13 (for example, the modulation and coding strategy level is 13) as the modulation and coding strategy for receiving PUSCH repetition on slot #0 and slot #1 in cycle #2, and determining the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index 15 (for example, the modulation and coding strategy level is 15) as the modulation and coding strategy for receiving PUSCH repetition on slot #8 and slot #9 in cycle #1.

如图8所示,例如,终端在多个时隙上进行的数据通信包括CG PUSCH,CG PUSCH的传输周期为5个时隙。图8中示出了三次CG PUSCH传输,分别位于TDD UL-DL周期#1中的slot#8,以及TDD UL-DL周期#2中slot#3和slot#8。As shown in FIG8 , for example, the data communication performed by the terminal on multiple time slots includes CG PUSCH, and the transmission period of CG PUSCH is 5 time slots. FIG8 shows three CG PUSCH transmissions, which are located in slot #8 in TDD UL-DL cycle #1, and slot #3 and slot #8 in TDD UL-DL cycle #2.

由于在slot#3上配置有上行子带,网络设备在周期#2的slot#3上不仅可以在上行子带上接收CG PUSCH,还可以在上行子带以外的频域资源进行下行通信,例如下行通信可以对接收CG PUSCH的过程造成干扰。而在周期#1和周期#2的slot#8上则只接收PUSCH,并不进行下行通信,所以并不存在下行通信对接收CG PUSCH过程的干扰。可 见,在周期#2的slot#3上的干扰,相对于周期#1和周期#2的slot#8上的干扰较强。Since an uplink subband is configured on slot#3, the network device can not only receive CG PUSCH on the uplink subband in slot#3 of cycle#2, but also perform downlink communication on frequency domain resources outside the uplink subband. For example, downlink communication can interfere with the process of receiving CG PUSCH. However, in slot#8 of cycle#1 and cycle#2, only PUSCH is received, and downlink communication is not performed. Therefore, there is no interference of downlink communication on the process of receiving CG PUSCH. It can be seen that the interference on slot #3 of cycle #2 is stronger than the interference on slot #8 of cycle #1 and cycle #2.

如果仅考虑周期#1和周期#2中slot#8上的干扰情况确定调制编码策略,并将该调制编码策略应用于周期#2的slot#3,由于周期#2中slot#3上的干扰相对较强,在采用该调制编码策略时,难以缓解周期#2中slot#3上的干扰,容易影响网络设备在周期#2中slot#3上接收CG PUSCH的通信质量。If the modulation and coding strategy is determined by only considering the interference conditions in slot #8 in cycle #1 and cycle #2, and the modulation and coding strategy is applied to slot #3 in cycle #2, since the interference in slot #3 in cycle #2 is relatively strong, it is difficult to alleviate the interference in slot #3 in cycle #2 when the modulation and coding strategy is adopted, which can easily affect the communication quality of the network device receiving CG PUSCH in slot #3 in cycle #2.

在本公开的实施例中,终端可以确定第一索引,进而终端可以根据第一索引和第一偏移量确定第二索引。例如,终端根据网络设备的指示或者协议约定确定第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略是第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。In an embodiment of the present disclosure, the terminal may determine the first index, and then the terminal may determine the second index according to the first index and the first offset. For example, the terminal determines that the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit according to an instruction of the network device or a protocol agreement.

以第一索引index#1为13,第一偏移量offset为2为例,终端可以确定第二索引index#2=index#1+offset=15。进而可以在索引与调制编码策略的关系表中确定索引13对应的调制编码策略(例如调制编码策略等级为13)为在周期#2中slot#3上发送CG PUSCH的调制编码策略,以及确定索引15对应的调制编码策略(例如调制编码策略等级为15)为周期#1和周期#2中slot#8上发送CG PUSCH的调制编码策略。Taking the first index index#1 as 13 and the first offset offset as 2 as an example, the terminal can determine the second index index#2=index#1+offset=15. Then, in the relationship table between index and modulation coding strategy, it can be determined that the modulation coding strategy corresponding to index 13 (for example, the modulation coding strategy level is 13) is the modulation coding strategy for sending CG PUSCH on slot#3 in cycle#2, and the modulation coding strategy corresponding to index 15 (for example, the modulation coding strategy level is 15) is the modulation coding strategy for sending CG PUSCH on slot#8 in cycle#1 and cycle#2.

由于索引13对应的调制编码策略相对于索引15对应的调制编码策略,在干扰相对较强的情况下,更有利于保证数据通信的通信质量,因此,在干扰较强的周期#2中slot#3上进行CG PUSCH通信采用索引13对应的调制编码策略,有利于保证良好的通信质量。Since the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index 13 is more conducive to ensuring the communication quality of data communication when the interference is relatively strong than the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index 15, the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index 13 is used for CG PUSCH communication in slot #3 in period #2 where the interference is relatively strong, which is conducive to ensuring good communication quality.

相对应地,网络设备也可以按照上述方式确定调制编码策略,从而确定索引13对应的调制编码策略(例如调制编码策略等级为13)为在周期#2中slot#3上接收CG PUSCH的调制编码策略,以及确定索引15对应的调制编码策略(例如调制编码策略等级为15)为周期#1和周期#2中slot#8上接收CG PUSCH的调制编码策略。Correspondingly, the network device can also determine the modulation and coding strategy in the above manner, thereby determining the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index 13 (for example, the modulation and coding strategy level is 13) as the modulation and coding strategy for receiving CG PUSCH on slot #3 in cycle #2, and determining the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index 15 (for example, the modulation and coding strategy level is 15) as the modulation and coding strategy for receiving CG PUSCH on slot #8 in cycle #1 and cycle #2.

在一些实施例中,第一索引可以是网络设备指示的,但是第一偏移量是协议约定的,第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略是第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,还是第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,也是协议约定的。In some embodiments, the first index may be indicated by a network device, but the first offset is agreed upon by the protocol, and whether the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit or the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is also agreed upon by the protocol.

例如,终端根据协议约定确定第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略是第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,且第一偏移量offset为-6。当终端接收到网络设备发送的信息,确定第一索引index#1为二进制10000,也即十进制的16,可以确定第二索引index#2=index#1+offse=10。进而可以确定索引16对应的调制编码策略为在第二类时域单元(非SBFD slot)上数据通信的调制编码策略,索引10对应的调制编码策略为在第一类时域单元(SBFD slot)上数据通信的调制编码策略。For example, the terminal determines according to the protocol that the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit, and the first offset offset is -6. When the terminal receives the information sent by the network device, it determines that the first index index#1 is binary 10000, that is, decimal 16, and it can be determined that the second index index#2 = index#1 + offset = 10. It can then be determined that the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index 16 is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit (non-SBFD slot), and the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index 10 is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit (SBFD slot).

在一些实施例中,第一信息用于指示终端根据网络设备指示的一个调制编码策略对应的一个第一索引和多个调制编码策略表确定在多个时域单元中的至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。In some embodiments, the first information is used to instruct the terminal to determine the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among multiple time domain units according to a first index corresponding to a modulation and coding strategy indicated by the network device and multiple modulation and coding strategy tables.

例如,多个调制编码策略表可以是协议约定的,或者是网络设备预先(例如在指示第一索引之前)配置给终端的,调制编码策略表可以表征调制编码策略与索引之间的关联关系。多个调制编码策略表中,每个调制编码策略表可以不同,也即调制编码策略与索引之间的关联关系可以不同,网络设备通过向终端指示一个第一索引,终端根据这个第一索引,在每个调制编码策略表中可以分别确定不同的调制编码策略。据此,终端可以确定至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,并确保第一类时域单元和第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略不同。For example, multiple modulation and coding strategy tables may be agreed upon by the protocol, or may be pre-configured to the terminal by the network device (for example, before indicating the first index), and the modulation and coding strategy table may characterize the association between the modulation and coding strategy and the index. Among the multiple modulation and coding strategy tables, each modulation and coding strategy table may be different, that is, the association between the modulation and coding strategy and the index may be different. The network device indicates a first index to the terminal, and the terminal may determine different modulation and coding strategies in each modulation and coding strategy table according to the first index. Accordingly, the terminal may determine the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit, and ensure that the modulation and coding strategies for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit are different.

在一些实施例中,调制编码策略表可以根据协议约定确定,或者,可以由网络设备指示,例如网络设备可以通过RRC信令(也可以称作RRC消息)向终端指示多个调制编码策略表。 In some embodiments, the modulation and coding strategy table may be determined according to a protocol agreement, or may be indicated by a network device. For example, the network device may indicate multiple modulation and coding strategy tables to the terminal via RRC signaling (also referred to as an RRC message).

在一些实施例中,多个调制编码策略表为两个调制编码策略表,其中,第一索引在一个调制编码策略表中对应的调制编码策略为在第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,第一索引在另一个调制编码策略表中对应的调制编码策略为在第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。In some embodiments, the multiple modulation coding strategy tables are two modulation coding strategy tables, wherein the modulation coding strategy corresponding to the first index in one modulation coding strategy table is the modulation coding strategy for data communication on a first type of time domain unit, and the modulation coding strategy corresponding to the first index in another modulation coding strategy table is the modulation coding strategy for data communication on a second type of time domain unit.

例如,终端中预先存储了两个调制编码策略表,网络设备可以通过第一指示信息向终端指示一个第一索引index#1。例如两个调制编码策略表为MCS table#1和MCS table#2。进而终端可以在MCS table#1中确定index#1对应的调制编码策略,例如为MCS等级13,以及在MCS table#2中确定index#1对应的调制编码策略,例如为MCS等级15。For example, two modulation and coding strategy tables are pre-stored in the terminal, and the network device can indicate a first index index#1 to the terminal through the first indication information. For example, the two modulation and coding strategy tables are MCS table#1 and MCS table#2. Then, the terminal can determine the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index#1 in MCS table#1, such as MCS level 13, and determine the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to index#1 in MCS table#2, such as MCS level 15.

在一些实施例中,网络设备可以向终端指示两个调制编码策略表与第一类时域单元和第二类时域单元的关联关系,或者,终端可以基于协议约定确定两个调制编码策略表与第一类时域单元和第二类时域单元的关联关系。In some embodiments, the network device can indicate to the terminal the association relationship between the two modulation and coding strategy tables and the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit, or the terminal can determine the association relationship between the two modulation and coding strategy tables and the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit based on protocol agreement.

例如,两个调制编码策略表与第一类时域单元和第二类时域单元的关联关系包括:MCS table#1与第一类时域单元相关联,MCS table#2与第二类时域单元相关联。那么终端根据第一索引在MCS table#1中确定的调制编码策略可以作为在第一类时域单元中进行数据通信所使用的调制编码策略,根据第一索引在MCS table#2中确定的调制编码策略可以作为在第二类时域单元中进行数据通信所使用的调制编码策略。For example, the association relationship between the two modulation and coding strategy tables and the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit includes: MCS table#1 is associated with the first type of time domain unit, and MCS table#2 is associated with the second type of time domain unit. Then the modulation and coding strategy determined by the terminal in MCS table#1 according to the first index can be used as the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication in the first type of time domain unit, and the modulation and coding strategy determined in MCS table#2 according to the first index can be used as the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication in the second type of time domain unit.

在一些实施例中,第一信息用于指示终端根据多个调制编码策略对应的多个第一索引,确定在多个时域单元中的至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。In some embodiments, the first information is used to instruct the terminal to determine a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among a plurality of time domain units according to a plurality of first indexes corresponding to a plurality of modulation and coding strategies.

网络设备可以通过第一指示信息向终端指示多个第一索引,其中,一个第一索引可以对应一个调制编码策略,那么终端根据多个第一索引可以确定多个调制编码策略,进而可以在多个调制编码策略中确定在第一类时域单元中进行数据通信所使用的调制编码策略,以及在第二类时域单元中进行数据通信所使用的调制编码策略,从而确定在至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。The network device can indicate multiple first indexes to the terminal through the first indication information, where one first index can correspond to a modulation and coding strategy. The terminal can then determine multiple modulation and coding strategies based on the multiple first indexes, and further determine the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication in the first type of time domain unit and the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication in the second type of time domain unit from the multiple modulation and coding strategies, thereby determining the modulation and coding strategy for data communication in at least one time domain unit.

在一些实施例中,多个第一索引为两个第一索引,其中,一个第一索引对应的调制编码策略为在第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,另一个第一索引对应的调制编码策略为在第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。In some embodiments, the multiple first indexes are two first indexes, wherein the modulation coding strategy corresponding to one first index is the modulation coding strategy for data communication on a first type of time domain unit, and the modulation coding strategy corresponding to another first index is the modulation coding strategy for data communication on a second type of time domain unit.

例如,例如,数据通信包括PUSCH repetition,网络设备在调度PUSCH的上行授权(UL grant)内,可以携带两个调制编码策略指示信息(MCS indication),例如两个调制编码策略的第一索引,分别为index#1和index#2。For example, data communication includes PUSCH repetition, and the network device can carry two modulation and coding strategy indication information (MCS indication) in the uplink grant (UL grant) scheduling PUSCH, such as the first indexes of two modulation and coding strategies, index#1 and index#2 respectively.

终端可以确定index#1对应的调制编码策略MCS#1,以及确定index#2对应的调制编码策略MCS#2,由于MCS#1和MCS#2可以不同,据此,终端可以确定第一类时域单元和第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,并确保第一类时域单元和第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略不同。The terminal can determine the modulation and coding strategy MCS#1 corresponding to index#1, and determine the modulation and coding strategy MCS#2 corresponding to index#2. Since MCS#1 and MCS#2 can be different, the terminal can determine the modulation and coding strategies for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit, and ensure that the modulation and coding strategies for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit are different.

在一些实施例中,网络设备可以向终端指示两个第一索引与第一类时域单元和第二类时域单元的关联关系,或者,终端可以基于协议约定确定两个第一索引与第一类时域单元和第二类时域单元的关联关系。In some embodiments, the network device can indicate to the terminal the association relationship between the two first indexes and the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit, or the terminal can determine the association relationship between the two first indexes and the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit based on protocol agreement.

例如,两个第一索引与第一类时域单元和第二类时域单元的关联关系可以包括以下至少之一:按照索引从小到大,分别关联第一类时域单元和第二类时域单元;按照索引从大到小,分别关联第一类时域单元和第二类时域单元。For example, the association relationship between the two first indexes and the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit may include at least one of the following: associating the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit respectively according to the index from small to large; associating the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit respectively according to the index from large to small.

以按照索引从小到大,分别关联第一类时域单元和第二类时域单元为例,index#1可以关联第一类时域单元,那么index#1对应的调制编码策略MCS#1可以作为在第一类 时域单元进行数据通信所用的调制编码策略;index#2可以关联第二类时域单元,那么index#2对应的调制编码策略MCS#2可以作为在第二类时域单元进行数据通信所用的调制编码策略。For example, according to the index from small to large, the first type of time domain unit and the second type of time domain unit are associated respectively. Index#1 can be associated with the first type of time domain unit, and the modulation and coding strategy MCS#1 corresponding to index#1 can be used as the modulation and coding strategy in the first type. The modulation and coding strategy used by the time domain unit for data communication; index#2 can be associated with the second type of time domain unit, then the modulation and coding strategy MCS#2 corresponding to index#2 can be used as the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication in the second type of time domain unit.

需要说明的是,终端确定的在第一类时域单元上数据通信所使用的调制编码策略,和网络设备确定的在第一类时域单元上数据通信所使用的调制编码策略,是相同的,据此,终端和网络设备在第一类时域单元上进行数据通信可以采用相同的调制编码策略。终端确定的在第二类时域单元上数据通信所使用的调制编码策略,和网络设备确定的在第二类时域单元上数据通信所使用的调制编码策略,也是相同的,据此,终端和网络设备在第二类时域单元上进行数据通信可以采用相同的调制编码策略。It should be noted that the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the first type of time domain unit determined by the terminal and the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the first type of time domain unit determined by the network device are the same, and accordingly, the terminal and the network device can use the same modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit. The modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the second type of time domain unit determined by the terminal and the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the second type of time domain unit determined by the network device are also the same, and accordingly, the terminal and the network device can use the same modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit.

而网络设备确定在多个时域单元中的至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略的方式,与终端确定在多个时域单元中的至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略的方式,则可以是相对应的。例如,终端根据网络设备指示的第一索引和第一偏移量确定在第一类时域单元上数据通信所使用的调制编码策略以及在第二类时域单元上数据通信所使用的调制编码策略,网络设备也可以根据指示给终端的第一索引和第一偏移量确定在第一类时域单元上数据通信所使用的调制编码策略以及在第二类时域单元上数据通信所使用的调制编码策略;例如,终端根据网络设备指示的多个第一索引确定在第一类时域单元上数据通信所使用的调制编码策略以及在第二类时域单元上数据通信所使用的调制编码策略,网络设备也可以根据指示给终端的多个第一索引和第一偏移量确定在第一类时域单元上数据通信所使用的调制编码策略以及在第二类时域单元上数据通信所使用的调制编码策略。具体可以参考前文实施例,此处不再赘述。The way in which the network device determines the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among multiple time domain units and the way in which the terminal determines the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among multiple time domain units may correspond. For example, the terminal determines the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the second type of time domain unit according to the first index and the first offset indicated by the network device, and the network device may also determine the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the second type of time domain unit according to the first index and the first offset indicated to the terminal; for example, the terminal determines the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the second type of time domain unit according to the multiple first indexes indicated by the network device, and the network device may also determine the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and the modulation and coding strategy used for data communication on the second type of time domain unit according to the multiple first indexes and the first offset indicated to the terminal. For details, please refer to the previous embodiment, which will not be repeated here.

在一些实施例中,信息等的名称不限定于实施例中所记载的名称,“信息(information)”、“消息(message)”、“信号(signal)”、“信令(signaling)”、“报告(report)”、“配置(configuration)”、“指示(indication)”、“指令(instruction)”、“命令(command)”、“信道”、“参数(parameter)”、“域”、“字段”、“符号(symbol)”、“码元(symbol)”、“码本(codebook)”、“码字(codeword)”、“码点(codepoint)”、“比特(bit)”、“数据(data)”、“程序(program)”、“码片(chip)”等术语可以相互替换。In some embodiments, the names of information, etc. are not limited to the names recorded in the embodiments, and terms such as "information", "message", "signal", "signaling", "report", "configuration", "indication", "instruction", "command", "channel", "parameter", "domain", "field", "symbol", "symbol", "code element", "codebook", "codeword", "codepoint", "bit", "data", "program", and "chip" can be used interchangeably.

在一些实施例中,“码本”、“码字”、“预编码矩阵”等术语可以相互替换。例如,码本可以是一个或多个码字/预编码矩阵的合集。In some embodiments, the terms "codebook", "codeword", "precoding matrix" and the like can be interchangeable. For example, a codebook can be a collection of one or more codewords/precoding matrices.

在一些实施例中,“上行”、“上行链路”、“物理上行链路”等术语可以相互替换,“下行”、“下行链路”、“物理下行链路”等术语可以相互替换,“侧行(side)”、“侧行链路(sidelink)”、“侧行通信”、“侧行链路通信”、“直连”、“直连链路”、“直连通信”、“直连链路通信”等术语可以相互替换。In some embodiments, terms such as "uplink", "uplink", "physical uplink" can be interchangeable, and terms such as "downlink", "downlink", "physical downlink" can be interchangeable, and terms such as "side", "sidelink", "side communication", "sidelink communication", "direct connection", "direct link", "direct communication", "direct link communication" can be interchangeable.

在一些实施例中,“下行链路控制信息(downlink control information,DCI)”、“下行链路(downlink,DL)分配(assignment)”、“DL DCI”、“上行链路(uplink,UL)许可(grant)”、“UL DCI”等术语可以相互替换。In some embodiments, the terms "downlink control information (DCI)", "downlink (DL) assignment (assignment)", "DL DCI", "uplink (UL) grant (grant)", "UL DCI" and so on can be used interchangeably.

在一些实施例中,“物理下行链路共享信道(physical downlink shared channel,PDSCH)”、“DL数据”等术语可以相互替换,“物理上行链路共享信道(physical uplink shared channel,PUSCH)”、“UL数据”等术语可以相互替换。In some embodiments, the terms "physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH)", "DL data" and the like can be interchangeable with each other, and the terms "physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH)", "UL data" and the like can be interchangeable with each other.

在一些实施例中,“无线(radio)”、“无线(wireless)”、“无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)”、“接入网(access network,AN)”、“基于RAN的(RAN-based)”等术语可以相互替换。In some embodiments, the terms "radio", "wireless", "radio access network (RAN)", "access network (AN)", "RAN-based" and the like may be used interchangeably.

在一些实施例中,“帧(frame)”、“无线帧(radio frame)”、“子帧(subframe)”、 “时隙(slot)”、“子时隙(sub-slot)”、“迷你时隙(mini-slot)”、“符号(symbol)”、“码元(symbol)”、“发送时间间隔(transmission time interval,TTI)”等术语可以相互替换。In some embodiments, the term "frame", "radio frame", "subframe", The terms "slot", "sub-slot", "mini-slot", "symbol", "symbol", "transmission time interval (TTI)" and the like are interchangeable.

在一些实施例中,“获取”、“获得”、“得到”、“接收”、“传输”、“双向传输”、“发送和/或接收”可以相互替换,其可以解释为从其他主体接收,从协议中获取,从高层获取,自身处理得到、自主实现等多种含义。In some embodiments, "obtain", "obtain", "get", "receive", "transmit", "bidirectional transmission", "send and/or receive" can be interchangeable, and can be interpreted as receiving from other entities, obtaining from protocols, obtaining from high levels, obtaining by self-processing, autonomous implementation, etc.

在一些实施例中,“发送”、“发射”、“上报”、“下发”、“传输”、“双向传输”、“发送和/或接收”等术语可以相互替换。In some embodiments, terms such as "send", "transmit", "report", "send", "transmit", "bidirectional transmission", "send and/or receive" can be used interchangeably.

需要说明的是,本实施例涉及的其他内容请参考前文各个实施例中相关内容的描述,这里不再赘述。It should be noted that for other contents involved in this embodiment, please refer to the description of the relevant contents in the previous embodiments, which will not be repeated here.

与前述的调制编码策略确定方法的实施例相对应地,本公开还提供了终端和网络设备的实施例。Corresponding to the aforementioned embodiment of the modulation and coding strategy determination method, the present disclosure also provides embodiments of a terminal and a network device.

本公开的实施例还提出一种终端,包括:一个或多个处理器;其中,终端用于执行第一方面、第一方面可选实施例所描述的调制编码策略确定方法。An embodiment of the present disclosure further proposes a terminal, comprising: one or more processors; wherein the terminal is used to execute the modulation and coding strategy determination method described in the first aspect and the optional embodiment of the first aspect.

图10是根据本公开的实施例示出的一种终端的示意框图。如图10所示,终端包括:处理模块1001。Fig. 10 is a schematic block diagram of a terminal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in Fig. 10 , the terminal includes: a processing module 1001 .

在一些实施例中,处理模块用于根据第一信息确定在多个时域单元中的至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,其中,多个时域单元包括配置有子带的第一类时域单元和未配置子带的第二类时域单元。In some embodiments, the processing module is used to determine a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among multiple time domain units based on the first information, wherein the multiple time domain units include a first type of time domain unit configured with a subband and a second type of time domain unit not configured with a subband.

在一些实施例中,数据通信包括以下至少之一:In some embodiments, the data communication includes at least one of the following:

在多个时域单元上重复接收的物理下行共享信道;A physical downlink shared channel repeatedly received over a plurality of time domain units;

在多个时域单元上重复发送的物理上行共享信道;A physical uplink shared channel that is repeatedly transmitted over multiple time domain units;

在多个时域单元上基于配置授权方式发送的物理上行共享信道;A physical uplink shared channel transmitted in a configuration grant manner over multiple time domain units;

在多个时域单元上基于触发方式接收的物理下行共享信道。A physical downlink shared channel is received in a triggered manner on multiple time domain units.

在一些实施例中,第一信息用于指示终端根据一个第一偏移量以及网络设备指示的一个调制编码策略对应的一个第一索引,确定在第一类时域单元上数据通信的第一调制编码策略以及在第二类时域单元数据通信的第二调制编码策略。In some embodiments, the first information is used to indicate that the terminal determines a first modulation and coding strategy for data communication on a first type of time domain unit and a second modulation and coding strategy for data communication on a second type of time domain unit based on a first offset and a first index corresponding to a modulation and coding strategy indicated by a network device.

在一些实施例中,处理模块,被配置为确定在第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略,在第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为第二索引对应的第二调制编码策略,其中,第二索引根据第一索引和第一偏移量确定;或者,确定在第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略,在第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为第二索引对应的第二调制编码策略,其中,第二索引根据第一索引和第一偏移量确定。In some embodiments, the processing module is configured to determine that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index, and the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is the second modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the second index, wherein the second index is determined based on the first index and the first offset; or, determine that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index, and the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit is the second modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the second index, wherein the second index is determined based on the first index and the first offset.

在一些实施例中,处理模块,还被配置为根据网络设备的指示确定在第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略;或者,根据网络设备的指示确定在第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略。In some embodiments, the processing module is also configured to determine, based on the indication of the network device, that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index; or, based on the indication of the network device, determine that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index.

在一些实施例中,处理模块,还被配置为根据协议约定确定在第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略;或者,根据协议约定确定在第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略。 In some embodiments, the processing module is also configured to determine, according to a protocol agreement, that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on a first type of time domain unit is a first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to a first index; or, according to a protocol agreement, determine that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on a second type of time domain unit is a first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to a first index.

在一些实施例中,第一偏移量为基于协议约定确定的,或者为网络设备指示的。In some embodiments, the first offset is determined based on a protocol agreement or is indicated by a network device.

在一些实施例中,第一信息用于指示终端根据多个调制编码策略对应的多个第一索引,确定在多个时域单元中的至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。In some embodiments, the first information is used to instruct the terminal to determine a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among a plurality of time domain units according to a plurality of first indexes corresponding to a plurality of modulation and coding strategies.

在一些实施例中,多个第一索引为两个第一索引,其中,一个第一索引对应的调制编码策略为在第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,另一个第一索引对应的调制编码策略为在第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。In some embodiments, the multiple first indexes are two first indexes, wherein the modulation coding strategy corresponding to one first index is the modulation coding strategy for data communication on a first type of time domain unit, and the modulation coding strategy corresponding to another first index is the modulation coding strategy for data communication on a second type of time domain unit.

在一些实施例中,第一信息用于指示终端根据网络设备指示的一个调制编码策略对应的一个第一索引和多个调制编码策略表确定在多个时域单元中的至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。In some embodiments, the first information is used to instruct the terminal to determine the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among multiple time domain units according to a first index corresponding to a modulation and coding strategy indicated by the network device and multiple modulation and coding strategy tables.

在一些实施例中,多个调制编码策略表为两个调制编码策略表,其中,第一索引在一个调制编码策略表中对应的调制编码策略为在第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,第一索引在另一个调制编码策略表中对应的调制编码策略为在第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。In some embodiments, the multiple modulation coding strategy tables are two modulation coding strategy tables, wherein the modulation coding strategy corresponding to the first index in one modulation coding strategy table is the modulation coding strategy for data communication on a first type of time domain unit, and the modulation coding strategy corresponding to the first index in another modulation coding strategy table is the modulation coding strategy for data communication on a second type of time domain unit.

在一些实施例中,子带包括以下至少之一:上行子带;下行子带。In some embodiments, the sub-band includes at least one of the following: an uplink sub-band; a downlink sub-band.

在一些实施例中,第一信息包括以下至少之一:协议约定的规则;网络设备的信令。In some embodiments, the first information includes at least one of the following: rules agreed upon by a protocol; signaling of a network device.

需要说明的是,终端除了可以如前文实施例所述包括处理模块,在一些实施例中,还可以包括其他模块,例如可以包括以下至少之一:发送模块、接收模块、存储模块、显示模块。It should be noted that, in addition to the processing module as described in the above embodiments, the terminal may also include other modules in some embodiments, for example, at least one of the following: a sending module, a receiving module, a storage module, and a display module.

本公开的实施例还提出一种网络设备,包括:一个或多个处理器;其中,网络设备用于执行第二方面、第二方面可选实施例所描述的调制编码策略确定方法。An embodiment of the present disclosure further proposes a network device, comprising: one or more processors; wherein the network device is used to execute the modulation and coding strategy determination method described in the second aspect and the optional embodiment of the second aspect.

图11是根据本公开的实施例示出的一种网络设备的示意框图。如图11所示,网络设备包括:发送模块1101。Fig. 11 is a schematic block diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in Fig. 11 , the network device includes: a sending module 1101 .

在一些实施例中,发送模块用于向终端发送第一信息,其中,第一信息用于确定在多个时域单元中的至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,多个时域单元包括配置有子带的第一类时域单元和未配置子带的第二类时域单元。In some embodiments, the sending module is used to send first information to the terminal, wherein the first information is used to determine a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among multiple time domain units, and the multiple time domain units include a first type of time domain unit configured with a subband and a second type of time domain unit not configured with a subband.

在一些实施例中,数据通信包括以下至少之一:In some embodiments, the data communication includes at least one of the following:

在多个时域单元上重复接收的物理下行共享信道;A physical downlink shared channel repeatedly received over a plurality of time domain units;

在多个时域单元上重复发送的物理上行共享信道;A physical uplink shared channel that is repeatedly transmitted over multiple time domain units;

在多个时域单元上基于配置授权方式发送的物理上行共享信道;A physical uplink shared channel transmitted in a configuration grant manner over multiple time domain units;

在多个时域单元上基于触发方式接收的物理下行共享信道。A physical downlink shared channel is received in a triggered manner on multiple time domain units.

在一些实施例中,第一信息用于指示终端根据一个第一偏移量以及网络设备指示的一个调制编码策略对应的一个第一索引,确定在第一类时域单元上数据通信的第一调制编码策略以及在第二类时域单元数据通信的第二调制编码策略。In some embodiments, the first information is used to indicate that the terminal determines a first modulation and coding strategy for data communication on a first type of time domain unit and a second modulation and coding strategy for data communication on a second type of time domain unit based on a first offset and a first index corresponding to a modulation and coding strategy indicated by a network device.

在一些实施例中,发送模块,还被配置为:指示终端确定在第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略;或者,指示终端确定在第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略。In some embodiments, the sending module is further configured to: instruct the terminal to determine that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index; or, instruct the terminal to determine that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index.

在一些实施例中,第一偏移量为基于协议约定确定的,或者为网络设备指示的。 In some embodiments, the first offset is determined based on a protocol agreement or is indicated by a network device.

在一些实施例中,第一信息用于指示终端根据多个调制编码策略对应的多个第一索引,确定在多个时域单元中的至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。In some embodiments, the first information is used to instruct the terminal to determine a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among a plurality of time domain units according to a plurality of first indexes corresponding to a plurality of modulation and coding strategies.

在一些实施例中,多个第一索引为两个第一索引,其中,一个第一索引对应的调制编码策略为在第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,另一个第一索引对应的调制编码策略为在第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。In some embodiments, the multiple first indexes are two first indexes, wherein the modulation coding strategy corresponding to one first index is the modulation coding strategy for data communication on a first type of time domain unit, and the modulation coding strategy corresponding to another first index is the modulation coding strategy for data communication on a second type of time domain unit.

在一些实施例中,第一信息用于指示终端根据网络设备指示的一个调制编码策略对应的一个第一索引和多个调制编码策略表确定在多个时域单元中的至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。In some embodiments, the first information is used to instruct the terminal to determine the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among multiple time domain units according to a first index corresponding to a modulation and coding strategy indicated by the network device and multiple modulation and coding strategy tables.

在一些实施例中,多个调制编码策略表为两个调制编码策略表,其中,第一索引在一个调制编码策略表中对应的调制编码策略为在第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,第一索引在另一个调制编码策略表中对应的调制编码策略为在第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。In some embodiments, the multiple modulation coding strategy tables are two modulation coding strategy tables, wherein the modulation coding strategy corresponding to the first index in one modulation coding strategy table is the modulation coding strategy for data communication on a first type of time domain unit, and the modulation coding strategy corresponding to the first index in another modulation coding strategy table is the modulation coding strategy for data communication on a second type of time domain unit.

在一些实施例中,子带包括以下至少之一:上行子带;下行子带。In some embodiments, the sub-band includes at least one of the following: an uplink sub-band; a downlink sub-band.

需要说明的是,网络设备除了可以如前文实施例所述包括发送模块,在一些实施例中,还可以包括其他模块,例如可以包括以下至少之一:处理模块、接收模块、存储模块、显示模块。It should be noted that, in addition to the sending module as described in the above embodiments, the network device may also include other modules in some embodiments, for example, at least one of the following: a processing module, a receiving module, a storage module, and a display module.

对于装置实施例而言,由于其基本对应于方法实施例,所以相关之处参见方法实施例的部分说明即可。以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,其中,所述作为分离部件说明的模块可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为模块显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理模块,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络模块上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部模块来实现本实施例方案的目的。本领域普通技术人员在不付出创造性劳动的情况下,即可以理解并实施。For the device embodiment, since it basically corresponds to the method embodiment, the relevant parts refer to the partial description of the method embodiment. The device embodiment described above is only schematic, wherein the modules described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as modules may or may not be physical modules, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network modules. Some or all of the modules may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the scheme of this embodiment. Ordinary technicians in this field can understand and implement it without paying creative work.

本公开的实施例还提出一种调制编码策略确定方法,所述方法包括:网络设备向终端发送第一信息;终端根据所述第一信息确定在多个时域单元中的至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,其中,所述多个时域单元包括配置有子带的第一类时域单元和未配置子带的第二类时域单元。An embodiment of the present disclosure also proposes a method for determining a modulation and coding strategy, the method comprising: a network device sends first information to a terminal; the terminal determines a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among multiple time domain units based on the first information, wherein the multiple time domain units include a first type of time domain unit configured with a subband and a second type of time domain unit not configured with a subband.

本公开的实施例还提出一种通信设备,包括:一个或多个处理器;其中,所述处理器用于调用指令以使得所述通信设备执行上述任一实施例所述的调制编码策略确定方法。An embodiment of the present disclosure further proposes a communication device, comprising: one or more processors; wherein the processor is used to call instructions so that the communication device executes the modulation and coding strategy determination method described in any of the above embodiments.

本公开的实施例还提出一种通信系统,包括终端、接入网设备、核心网设备,其中,所述终端被配置为实现上述任一实施例所述的调制编码策略确定方法。An embodiment of the present disclosure further proposes a communication system, including a terminal, an access network device, and a core network device, wherein the terminal is configured to implement the modulation and coding strategy determination method described in any of the above embodiments.

本公开的实施例还提出一种存储介质,所述存储介质存储有指令,当所述指令在通信设备上运行时,使得所述通信设备执行上述任一实施例所述的调制编码策略确定方法。An embodiment of the present disclosure further proposes a storage medium storing instructions, which, when executed on a communication device, enables the communication device to execute the modulation and coding strategy determination method described in any of the above embodiments.

本公开实施例还提出用于实现以上任一方法的装置,例如,提出一装置,上述装置包括用以实现以上任一方法中终端所执行的各步骤的单元或模块。再如,还提出另一装置,包括用以实现以上任一方法中网络设备(例如接入网设备、核心网功能节点、核心网设备等)所执行的各步骤的单元或模块。The embodiments of the present disclosure also propose a device for implementing any of the above methods, for example, a device is proposed, the above device includes a unit or module for implementing each step performed by the terminal in any of the above methods. For another example, another device is also proposed, including a unit or module for implementing each step performed by a network device (such as an access network device, a core network function node, a core network device, etc.) in any of the above methods.

应理解以上装置中各单元或模块的划分仅是一种逻辑功能的划分,在实际实现时可以全部或部分集成到一个物理实体上,也可以物理上分开。此外,装置中的单元或模块可以以处理器调用软件的形式实现:例如装置包括处理器,处理器与存储器连接,存 储器中存储有指令,处理器调用存储器中存储的指令,以实现以上任一方法或实现上述装置各单元或模块的功能,其中处理器例如为通用处理器,例如中央处理单元(Central Processing Unit,CPU)或微处理器,存储器为装置内的存储器或装置外的存储器。或者,装置中的单元或模块可以以硬件电路的形式实现,可以通过对硬件电路的设计实现部分或全部单元或模块的功能,上述硬件电路可以理解为一个或多个处理器;例如,在一种实现中,上述硬件电路为专用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit,ASIC),通过对电路内元件逻辑关系的设计,实现以上部分或全部单元或模块的功能;再如,在另一种实现中,上述硬件电路为可以通过可编程逻辑器件(programmable logic device,PLD)实现,以现场可编程门阵列(Field Programmable Gate Array,FPGA)为例,其可以包括大量逻辑门电路,通过配置文件来配置逻辑门电路之间的连接关系,从而实现以上部分或全部单元或模块的功能。以上装置的所有单元或模块可以全部通过处理器调用软件的形式实现,或全部通过硬件电路的形式实现,或部分通过处理器调用软件的形式实现,剩余部分通过硬件电路的形式实现。It should be understood that the division of the units or modules in the above device is only a division of logical functions. In actual implementation, they can be fully or partially integrated into one physical entity, or they can be physically separated. In addition, the units or modules in the device can be implemented in the form of a processor calling software: for example, the device includes a processor, the processor is connected to a memory, and the memory Instructions are stored in the memory, and the processor calls the instructions stored in the memory to implement any of the above methods or implement the functions of each unit or module of the above device, wherein the processor is, for example, a general-purpose processor, such as a central processing unit (CPU) or a microprocessor, and the memory is a memory in the device or a memory outside the device. Alternatively, the unit or module in the device can be implemented in the form of a hardware circuit, and the functions of some or all of the units or modules can be implemented by designing the hardware circuit. The above hardware circuit can be understood as one or more processors; for example, in one implementation, the above hardware circuit is an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), and the functions of some or all of the above units or modules are implemented by designing the logical relationship of the components in the circuit; for example, in another implementation, the above hardware circuit can be implemented by a programmable logic device (PLD), taking a field programmable gate array (FPGA) as an example, which can include a large number of logic gate circuits, and the connection relationship between the logic gate circuits is configured by a configuration file, so as to implement the functions of some or all of the above units or modules. All units or modules of the above devices may be implemented entirely in the form of a processor calling software, or entirely in the form of a hardware circuit, or partially in the form of a processor calling software and the rest in the form of a hardware circuit.

在本公开实施例中,处理器是具有信号处理能力的电路,在一种实现中,处理器可以是具有指令读取与运行能力的电路,例如中央处理单元(Central Processing Unit,CPU)、微处理器、图形处理器(graphics processing unit,GPU)(可以理解为微处理器)、或数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP)等;在另一种实现中,处理器可以通过硬件电路的逻辑关系实现一定功能,上述硬件电路的逻辑关系是固定的或可以重构的,例如处理器为专用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit,ASIC)或可编程逻辑器件(programmable logic device,PLD)实现的硬件电路,例如FPGA。在可重构的硬件电路中,处理器加载配置文档,实现硬件电路配置的过程,可以理解为处理器加载指令,以实现以上部分或全部单元或模块的功能的过程。此外,还可以是针对人工智能设计的硬件电路,其可以理解为ASIC,例如神经网络处理单元(Neural Network Processing Unit,NPU)、张量处理单元(Tensor Processing Unit,TPU)、深度学习处理单元(Deep learning Processing Unit,DPU)等。In the disclosed embodiments, the processor is a circuit with signal processing capability. In one implementation, the processor may be a circuit with instruction reading and running capability, such as a central processing unit (CPU), a microprocessor, a graphics processing unit (GPU) (which may be understood as a microprocessor), or a digital signal processor (DSP); in another implementation, the processor may implement certain functions through the logical relationship of a hardware circuit, and the logical relationship of the above hardware circuit may be fixed or reconfigurable, such as a hardware circuit implemented by an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC) or a programmable logic device (PLD), such as an FPGA. In a reconfigurable hardware circuit, the process of the processor loading a configuration document to implement the hardware circuit configuration may be understood as the process of the processor loading instructions to implement the functions of some or all of the above units or modules. In addition, it can also be a hardware circuit designed for artificial intelligence, which can be understood as ASIC, such as Neural Network Processing Unit (NPU), Tensor Processing Unit (TPU), Deep Learning Processing Unit (DPU), etc.

图12是本公开实施例提出的通信设备12100的结构示意图。通信设备12100可以是网络设备(例如接入网设备、核心网设备等),也可以是终端(例如用户设备等),也可以是支持网络设备实现以上任一方法的芯片、芯片系统、或处理器等,还可以是支持终端实现以上任一方法的芯片、芯片系统、或处理器等。通信设备12100可用于实现上述方法实施例中描述的方法,具体可以参见上述方法实施例中的说明。FIG12 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device 12100 proposed in an embodiment of the present disclosure. The communication device 12100 may be a network device (e.g., an access network device, a core network device, etc.), or a terminal (e.g., a user device, etc.), or a chip, a chip system, or a processor that supports a network device to implement any of the above methods, or a chip, a chip system, or a processor that supports a terminal to implement any of the above methods. The communication device 12100 may be used to implement the method described in the above method embodiment, and the details may refer to the description in the above method embodiment.

如图12所示,通信设备12100包括一个或多个处理器12101。处理器12101可以是通用处理器或者专用处理器等,例如可以是基带处理器或中央处理器。基带处理器可以用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,中央处理器可以用于对通信装置(如,基站、基带芯片,终端设备、终端设备芯片,DU或CU等)进行控制,执行程序,处理程序的数据。处理器12101用于调用指令以使得通信设备12100执行以上任一方法。As shown in FIG12 , the communication device 12100 includes one or more processors 12101. The processor 12101 may be a general-purpose processor or a dedicated processor, for example, a baseband processor or a central processing unit. The baseband processor may be used to process the communication protocol and the communication data, and the central processing unit may be used to control the communication device (such as a base station, a baseband chip, a terminal device, a terminal device chip, a DU or a CU, etc.), execute a program, and process the data of the program. The processor 12101 is used to call instructions so that the communication device 12100 executes any of the above methods.

在一些实施例中,通信设备12100还包括用于存储指令的一个或多个存储器12102。可选地,全部或部分存储器12102也可以处于通信设备12100之外。In some embodiments, the communication device 12100 further includes one or more memories 12102 for storing instructions. Optionally, all or part of the memory 12102 may also be outside the communication device 12100.

在一些实施例中,通信设备12100还包括一个或多个收发器12103。在通信设备12100包括一个或多个收发器12103时,上述方法中的发送接收等通信步骤由收发器12103执行,其他步骤由处理器12101执行。In some embodiments, the communication device 12100 further includes one or more transceivers 12103. When the communication device 12100 includes one or more transceivers 12103, the communication steps such as sending and receiving in the above method are performed by the transceiver 12103, and the other steps are performed by the processor 12101.

在一些实施例中,收发器可以包括接收器和发送器,接收器和发送器可以是分离的,也可以集成在一起。可选地,收发器、收发单元、收发机、收发电路等术语可以相互替换,发送器、发送单元、发送机、发送电路等术语可以相互替换,接收器、接收单 元、接收机、接收电路等术语可以相互替换。In some embodiments, the transceiver may include a receiver and a transmitter, and the receiver and the transmitter may be separate or integrated. Optionally, the terms transceiver, transceiver unit, transceiver, transceiver circuit, etc. may be interchangeable, and the terms transmitter, transmission unit, transmitter, transmission circuit, etc. may be interchangeable. The receiver, receiving unit, transmitter, etc. may be interchangeable. The terms element, receiver, receiving circuit, etc. are used interchangeably.

可选地,通信设备12100还包括一个或多个接口电路12104,接口电路12104与存储器12102连接,接口电路12104可用于从存储器12102或其他装置接收信号,可用于向存储器12102或其他装置发送信号。例如,接口电路12104可读取存储器12102中存储的指令,并将该指令发送给处理器12101。Optionally, the communication device 12100 further includes one or more interface circuits 12104, which are connected to the memory 12102. The interface circuit 12104 can be used to receive signals from the memory 12102 or other devices, and can be used to send signals to the memory 12102 or other devices. For example, the interface circuit 12104 can read instructions stored in the memory 12102 and send the instructions to the processor 12101.

以上实施例描述中的通信设备12100可以是网络设备或者终端,但本公开中描述的通信设备12100的范围并不限于此,通信设备12100的结构可以不受图12的限制。通信设备可以是独立的设备或者可以是较大设备的一部分。例如所述通信设备可以是:1)独立的集成电路IC,或芯片,或,芯片系统或子系统;(2)具有一个或多个IC的集合,可选地,上述IC集合也可以包括用于存储数据,程序的存储部件;(3)ASIC,例如调制编码器(Modem);(4)可嵌入在其他设备内的模块;(5)接收机、终端设备、智能终端设备、蜂窝电话、无线设备、手持机、移动单元、车载设备、网络设备、云设备、人工智能设备等等;(6)其他等等。The communication device 12100 described in the above embodiments may be a network device or a terminal, but the scope of the communication device 12100 described in the present disclosure is not limited thereto, and the structure of the communication device 12100 may not be limited by FIG. 12. The communication device may be an independent device or may be part of a larger device. For example, the communication device may be: 1) an independent integrated circuit IC, or a chip, or a chip system or subsystem; (2) a collection of one or more ICs, optionally, the above IC collection may also include a storage component for storing data and programs; (3) an ASIC, such as a modulation encoder (Modem); (4) a module that can be embedded in other devices; (5) a receiver, a terminal device, an intelligent terminal device, a cellular phone, a wireless device, a handheld device, a mobile unit, a vehicle-mounted device, a network device, a cloud device, an artificial intelligence device, etc.; (6) others, etc.

图13是本公开实施例提出的芯片13200的结构示意图。对于通信设备12100可以是芯片或芯片系统的情况,可以参见图13所示的芯片13200的结构示意图,但不限于此。Fig. 13 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a chip 13200 provided in an embodiment of the present disclosure. In the case where the communication device 12100 may be a chip or a chip system, reference may be made to the schematic diagram of the structure of the chip 13200 shown in Fig. 13, but the present disclosure is not limited thereto.

芯片13200包括一个或多个处理器13201,处理器13201用于调用指令以使得芯片13200执行以上任一方法。The chip 13200 includes one or more processors 13201, and the processor 13201 is used to call instructions so that the chip 13200 executes any of the above methods.

在一些实施例中,芯片13200还包括一个或多个接口电路13202,接口电路13202与存储器13203连接,接口电路13202可以用于从存储器13203或其他装置接收信号,接口电路13202可用于向存储器In some embodiments, the chip 13200 further includes one or more interface circuits 13202, the interface circuits 13202 are connected to the memory 13203, the interface circuits 13202 can be used to receive signals from the memory 13203 or other devices, and the interface circuits 13202 can be used to send signals to the memory

13203或其他装置发送信号。例如,接口电路13202可读取存储器13203中存储的指令,并将该指令发送给处理器13201。可选地,接口电路、接口、收发管脚、收发器等术语可以相互替换。13203 or other devices to send signals. For example, the interface circuit 13202 can read the instructions stored in the memory 13203 and send the instructions to the processor 13201. Optionally, the terms such as interface circuit, interface, transceiver pin, transceiver, etc. can be replaced with each other.

在一些实施例中,芯片13200还包括用于存储指令的一个或多个存储器13203。可选地,全部或部分存储器13203可以处于芯片13200之外。In some embodiments, the chip 13200 further includes one or more memories 13203 for storing instructions. Optionally, all or part of the memory 13203 may be outside the chip 13200.

本公开还提出存储介质,上述存储介质上存储有指令,当上述指令在通信设备12100上运行时,使得通信设备12100执行以上任一方法。可选地,上述存储介质是电子存储介质。可选地,上述存储介质是计算机可读存储介质,但不限于此,其也可以是其他装置可读的存储介质。可选地,上述存储介质可以是非暂时性(non-transitory)存储介质,但不限于此,其也可以是暂时性存储介质。The present disclosure also proposes a storage medium, on which instructions are stored, and when the instructions are executed on the communication device 12100, the communication device 12100 executes any of the above methods. Optionally, the storage medium is an electronic storage medium. Optionally, the storage medium is a computer-readable storage medium, but is not limited to this, and it can also be a storage medium readable by other devices. Optionally, the storage medium can be a non-transitory storage medium, but is not limited to this, and it can also be a temporary storage medium.

本公开还提出程序产品,上述程序产品被通信设备12100执行时,使得通信设备12100执行以上任一方法。可选地,上述程序产品是计算机程序产品。The present disclosure also proposes a program product, and when the program product is executed by the communication device 12100, the communication device 12100 executes any of the above methods. Optionally, the program product is a computer program product.

本公开还提出计算机程序,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行以上任一方法。 The present disclosure also proposes a computer program, which, when executed on a computer, causes the computer to execute any one of the above methods.

Claims (29)

一种调制编码策略确定方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A method for determining a modulation and coding strategy, characterized in that the method comprises: 根据第一信息确定在多个时域单元中的至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,其中,所述多个时域单元包括配置有子带的第一类时域单元和未配置子带的第二类时域单元。A modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among a plurality of time domain units is determined according to the first information, wherein the plurality of time domain units include a first type of time domain unit configured with a subband and a second type of time domain unit not configured with a subband. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述数据通信包括以下至少之一:The method according to claim 1, wherein the data communication comprises at least one of the following: 在所述多个时域单元上重复接收的物理下行共享信道;Repeating the received physical downlink shared channel on the multiple time domain units; 在所述多个时域单元上重复发送的物理上行共享信道;A physical uplink shared channel repeatedly transmitted on the plurality of time domain units; 在所述多个时域单元上基于配置授权方式发送的物理上行共享信道;A physical uplink shared channel sent in a configuration authorization manner on the multiple time domain units; 在所述多个时域单元上基于触发方式接收的物理下行共享信道。A physical downlink shared channel is received on the multiple time domain units based on a triggering manner. 根据权利要求1至2中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一信息用于指示终端根据一个第一偏移量以及网络设备指示的一个调制编码策略对应的一个第一索引,确定在所述第一类时域单元上数据通信的第一调制编码策略以及在所述第二类时域单元数据通信的第二调制编码策略。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 2 is characterized in that the first information is used to indicate the terminal to determine a first modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and a second modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit based on a first offset and a first index corresponding to a modulation and coding strategy indicated by a network device. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据第一信息确定在多个时域单元中的至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,包括:The method according to claim 3, characterized in that the step of determining, according to the first information, a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among the plurality of time domain units comprises: 确定在所述第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为所述第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略,在所述第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为第二索引对应的第二调制编码策略,其中,所述第二索引根据所述第一索引和所述第一偏移量确定;或者,Determine that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index, and the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is the second modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the second index, wherein the second index is determined according to the first index and the first offset; or 确定在所述第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为所述第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略,在所述第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为第二索引对应的第二调制编码策略,其中,所述第二索引根据所述第一索引和所述第一偏移量确定。Determine that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index, and the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit is the second modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the second index, wherein the second index is determined based on the first index and the first offset. 根据权利要求4所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 4, characterized in that the method further comprises: 根据网络设备的指示确定在所述第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为所述第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略;或者,Determine, according to an instruction of a network device, that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index; or, 根据网络设备的指示确定在所述第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为所述第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略。According to the instruction of the network device, the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is determined to be the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index. 根据权利要求4所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 4, characterized in that the method further comprises: 根据协议约定确定在所述第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为所述第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略;或者,Determine, according to a protocol agreement, that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index; or, 根据协议约定确定在所述第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为所述第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略。According to the protocol agreement, the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit is determined to be the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index. 根据权利要求3或6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一偏移量为基于协议约定确定的,或者为网络设备指示的。The method according to claim 3 or 6 is characterized in that the first offset is determined based on a protocol agreement or is indicated by a network device. 根据权利要求1至2中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一信息用于指示终端根据多个调制编码策略对应的多个第一索引,确定在所述多个时域单元中的至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 2 is characterized in that the first information is used to instruct the terminal to determine the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among the multiple time domain units according to multiple first indexes corresponding to multiple modulation and coding strategies. 根据权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述多个第一索引为两个第一索引,其中,一个第一索引对应的调制编码策略为在所述第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,另一个第一索引对应的调制编码策略为在所述第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。The method according to claim 8 is characterized in that the multiple first indexes are two first indexes, wherein the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to one first index is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit, and the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the other first index is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit. 根据权利要求1至2中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一信息用于指示终端根据网络设备指示的一个调制编码策略对应的一个第一索引和多个调制编码策略表确定在所述多个时域单元中的至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 2 is characterized in that the first information is used to indicate that the terminal determines the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among the multiple time domain units according to a first index corresponding to a modulation and coding strategy indicated by a network device and multiple modulation and coding strategy tables. 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述多个调制编码策略表为两个调 制编码策略表,其中,所述第一索引在一个调制编码策略表中对应的调制编码策略为在所述第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,所述第一索引在另一个调制编码策略表中对应的调制编码策略为在所述第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。The method according to claim 10 is characterized in that the multiple modulation and coding strategy tables are two modulation A modulation and coding strategy table, wherein the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index in one modulation and coding strategy table is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit, and the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index in another modulation and coding strategy table is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit. 根据权利要求1至11中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述子带包括以下至少之一:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 11, characterized in that the sub-band includes at least one of the following: 上行子带;Upstream subband; 下行子带。Downstream subband. 根据权利要求1至12中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一信息包括以下至少之一:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 12, characterized in that the first information includes at least one of the following: 协议约定的规则;The rules agreed upon in the agreement; 网络设备的信令。Signaling of network devices. 一种调制编码策略确定方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A method for determining a modulation and coding strategy, characterized in that the method comprises: 向终端发送第一信息,其中,所述第一信息用于确定在多个时域单元中的至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,所述多个时域单元包括配置有子带的第一类时域单元和未配置子带的第二类时域单元。First information is sent to a terminal, wherein the first information is used to determine a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among a plurality of time domain units, wherein the plurality of time domain units include a first type of time domain unit configured with a subband and a second type of time domain unit not configured with a subband. 根据权利要求14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述数据通信包括以下至少之一:The method according to claim 14, characterized in that the data communication includes at least one of the following: 在所述多个时域单元上重复接收的物理下行共享信道;Repeating the received physical downlink shared channel on the multiple time domain units; 在所述多个时域单元上重复发送的物理上行共享信道;A physical uplink shared channel repeatedly transmitted on the plurality of time domain units; 在所述多个时域单元上基于配置授权方式发送的物理上行共享信道;A physical uplink shared channel sent in a configuration authorization manner on the multiple time domain units; 在所述多个时域单元上基于触发方式接收的物理下行共享信道。A physical downlink shared channel is received on the multiple time domain units based on a triggering manner. 根据权利要求14至15中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一信息用于指示所述终端根据一个第一偏移量以及网络设备指示的一个调制编码策略对应的一个第一索引,确定在所述第一类时域单元上数据通信的第一调制编码策略以及在所述第二类时域单元数据通信的第二调制编码策略。The method according to any one of claims 14 to 15 is characterized in that the first information is used to instruct the terminal to determine a first modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit and a second modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit based on a first offset and a first index corresponding to a modulation and coding strategy indicated by a network device. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 16, characterized in that the method further comprises: 指示所述终端确定在所述第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为所述第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略;或者,instructing the terminal to determine that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index; or, 指示所述终端确定在所述第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略为所述第一索引对应的第一调制编码策略。Instruct the terminal to determine that the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second-type time domain unit is the first modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一偏移量为基于协议约定确定的,或者为所述网络设备指示的。The method according to claim 16 is characterized in that the first offset is determined based on a protocol agreement or is indicated by the network device. 根据权利要求14至15中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一信息用于指示所述终端根据多个调制编码策略对应的多个第一索引,确定在所述多个时域单元中的至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。The method according to any one of claims 14 to 15 is characterized in that the first information is used to instruct the terminal to determine the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among the multiple time domain units according to multiple first indexes corresponding to multiple modulation and coding strategies. 根据权利要求19所述的方法,其特征在于,所述多个第一索引为两个第一索引,其中,一个第一索引对应的调制编码策略为在所述第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,另一个第一索引对应的调制编码策略为在所述第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。The method according to claim 19 is characterized in that the multiple first indexes are two first indexes, wherein the modulation coding strategy corresponding to one first index is the modulation coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit, and the modulation coding strategy corresponding to the other first index is the modulation coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit. 根据权利要求14至15中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一信息用于指示所述终端根据网络设备指示的一个调制编码策略对应的一个第一索引和多个调制编码策略表确定在所述多个时域单元中的至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。The method according to any one of claims 14 to 15 is characterized in that the first information is used to instruct the terminal to determine the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among the multiple time domain units based on a first index corresponding to a modulation and coding strategy indicated by a network device and multiple modulation and coding strategy tables. 根据权利要求21所述的方法,其特征在于,所述多个调制编码策略表为两个调制编码策略表,其中,所述第一索引在一个调制编码策略表中对应的调制编码策略为在所述第一类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,所述第一索引在另一个调制编码策略表中对应的调制编码策略为在所述第二类时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略。 The method according to claim 21 is characterized in that the multiple modulation and coding strategy tables are two modulation and coding strategy tables, wherein the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index in one modulation and coding strategy table is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the first type of time domain unit, and the modulation and coding strategy corresponding to the first index in another modulation and coding strategy table is the modulation and coding strategy for data communication on the second type of time domain unit. 根据权利要求14至22中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述子带包括以下至少之一:The method according to any one of claims 14 to 22, characterized in that the sub-band includes at least one of the following: 上行子带;Upstream subband; 下行子带。Downstream subband. 一种调制编码策略确定方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A method for determining a modulation and coding strategy, characterized in that the method comprises: 网络设备向终端发送第一信息;The network device sends first information to the terminal; 终端根据所述第一信息确定在多个时域单元中的至少一个时域单元上数据通信的调制编码策略,其中,所述多个时域单元包括配置有子带的第一类时域单元和未配置子带的第二类时域单元。The terminal determines a modulation and coding strategy for data communication on at least one time domain unit among multiple time domain units based on the first information, wherein the multiple time domain units include a first type of time domain unit configured with a subband and a second type of time domain unit not configured with a subband. 一种终端,其特征在于,包括:A terminal, characterized by comprising: 一个或多个处理器;one or more processors; 其中,所述终端用于执行权利要求1-14中任一项所述的调制编码策略确定方法。The terminal is used to execute the modulation and coding strategy determination method according to any one of claims 1-14. 一种网络设备,其特征在于,包括:A network device, comprising: 一个或多个处理器;one or more processors; 其中,所述网络设备用于执行权利要求15-23中任一项所述的调制编码策略确定方法。Wherein, the network device is used to execute the modulation and coding strategy determination method described in any one of claims 15-23. 一种通信设备,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, comprising: 一个或多个处理器;one or more processors; 其中,所述处理器用于调用指令以使得所述通信设备执行权利要求1-14、15-23中任一项所述的调制编码策略确定方法。The processor is used to call instructions to enable the communication device to execute the modulation and coding strategy determination method described in any one of claims 1-14 and 15-23. 一种通信系统,其特征在于,包括终端、接入网设备、核心网设备,其中,所述终端被配置为实现权利要求1-14、15-23中任一项所述的调制编码策略确定方法。A communication system, characterized in that it includes a terminal, an access network device, and a core network device, wherein the terminal is configured to implement the modulation and coding strategy determination method described in any one of claims 1-14 and 15-23. 一种存储介质,所述存储介质存储有指令,其特征在于,当所述指令在通信设备上运行时,使得所述通信设备执行如权利要求1-14、15-23中任一项所述的调制编码策略确定方法。 A storage medium storing instructions, characterized in that when the instructions are executed on a communication device, the communication device executes the modulation and coding strategy determination method as described in any one of claims 1-14 and 15-23.
PCT/CN2023/102947 2023-06-27 2023-06-27 Modulation and coding scheme determination method, communication device, and storage medium Pending WO2025000242A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202380009838.4A CN117083965A (en) 2023-06-27 2023-06-27 Modulation and coding strategy determination method, communication device, and storage medium
PCT/CN2023/102947 WO2025000242A1 (en) 2023-06-27 2023-06-27 Modulation and coding scheme determination method, communication device, and storage medium

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2023/102947 WO2025000242A1 (en) 2023-06-27 2023-06-27 Modulation and coding scheme determination method, communication device, and storage medium

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2025000242A1 true WO2025000242A1 (en) 2025-01-02

Family

ID=88712056

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2023/102947 Pending WO2025000242A1 (en) 2023-06-27 2023-06-27 Modulation and coding scheme determination method, communication device, and storage medium

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN117083965A (en)
WO (1) WO2025000242A1 (en)

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102468920A (en) * 2010-11-01 2012-05-23 华为技术有限公司 Method, device and system for self-adaption code modulation
CN106412876A (en) * 2015-07-28 2017-02-15 中国电信股份有限公司 Transmission method, device, terminal and system
CN111543113A (en) * 2018-04-03 2020-08-14 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Method and device for data transmission
CN111901273A (en) * 2020-01-17 2020-11-06 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Modulation coding method, device, equipment and storage medium
WO2022077142A1 (en) * 2020-10-12 2022-04-21 华为技术有限公司 Method for sending physical uplink shared channel and communication apparatus

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102468920A (en) * 2010-11-01 2012-05-23 华为技术有限公司 Method, device and system for self-adaption code modulation
CN106412876A (en) * 2015-07-28 2017-02-15 中国电信股份有限公司 Transmission method, device, terminal and system
CN111543113A (en) * 2018-04-03 2020-08-14 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Method and device for data transmission
CN111901273A (en) * 2020-01-17 2020-11-06 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Modulation coding method, device, equipment and storage medium
WO2022077142A1 (en) * 2020-10-12 2022-04-21 华为技术有限公司 Method for sending physical uplink shared channel and communication apparatus

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN117083965A (en) 2023-11-17

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2025030560A1 (en) Method for determining uplink transmission resource, and communication apparatus, communication device and storage medium
WO2025059882A1 (en) Resource determination methods, apparatus, and storage medium
WO2025000303A1 (en) Information indication method, and terminal, network device, communication system and storage medium
WO2024234261A1 (en) Resource configuration method, system and apparatus, communication device, and storage medium
WO2025000201A1 (en) Method and apparatus for determining uplink transmission behavior, and storage medium
WO2025065186A1 (en) Frequency-domain-resource allocation method and apparatus, and storage medium
WO2025000549A1 (en) Information transmission method and apparatus, and storage medium
WO2025065453A1 (en) Resource determination method and apparatus, and storage medium
WO2025000242A1 (en) Modulation and coding scheme determination method, communication device, and storage medium
WO2025065613A1 (en) Capability determination method and apparatus, and storage medium
WO2025000563A1 (en) Uplink communication processing method, communication device, and storage medium
WO2025000547A1 (en) Uplink communication processing method, communication device, and storage medium
WO2025065450A1 (en) Resource determination method and apparatus, and storage medium
WO2025065455A1 (en) Method and apparatus for determining time window, and storage medium
WO2025000153A1 (en) Resource determination method, terminal, network device, communication device, and storage medium
WO2025236160A1 (en) Information reception method and apparatus, information transmission method and apparatus, terminal, network device, and storage medium
WO2025129705A1 (en) Resource determination method and apparatus, resource indication method and apparatus, and storage medium
WO2025208541A1 (en) Relationship determination method and apparatus, terminal, network device, and storage medium
WO2025000306A1 (en) Information indication method, terminal, network device, communication system and storage medium
WO2025000548A1 (en) Information determination method and apparatus and storage medium
CN120604602A (en) Resource configuration method, terminal, network device and storage medium
WO2025200015A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus, and storage medium
WO2025035326A1 (en) Information determination method, terminal, network device, communication device, and storage medium
WO2025147928A1 (en) Information receiving method and apparatus, information sending method and apparatus, terminal, network device, and storage medium
WO2025000207A1 (en) Hybrid automatic repeat request (harq) process configuration method, and terminal

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23942766

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1